Home

Merlin Plus R2 System Manual

1. MERLIN Plus System Features 5 87 Intercom Preference DESCRIPTION Intercom Preference provides an intercom line immediately upon touching Speakerphone or lifting the handset CONSIDERATIONS If you are at a voice terminal that either has Intercom Preference or has no outside lines assigned to it you will be connected to an intercom line when you touch Speakerphone or lift your handset NOTE This feature does not remove access to outside lines from the voice terminal outside lines can only be removed by the attendant at the attendant console during administration If you want to restrict access to outside lines for a voice terminal located in a lobby or public area you would have to administer this restriction However to provide the convenience of an intercom line immediately upon pickup use Intercom Preference ADMINISTRATION None PROGRAMMING To program Intercom Preference 1 Slide the T P switch to P 2 Dial 3 Slide the T P switch to the center position uuU T e P anau T gt P soe _ _ weet _ HOW TO USE If the voice terminal you are using has been programmed for Intercom Preference you will be connected to an intercom line when you either touch Speakerphone or lift your handset 5 88 MERLIN Plus System Features Last Number Dial DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING With a Last Number Dial button you can redial wi
2. eau San T P o Ban unn Ren Baa LI o Administer ol aan ane Drop m 0l 08 01 10 Administer m clear all the entries from an Allowed List Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer Dial a and a 2 digit code 01 through 08 that corresponds to the number of the list you want to clear For example to clear all entries from List 6 dial 06 Touch Drop The console beeps twice Touch Administer The console beeps twice MERLIN Plus System Features 5 7 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position Before you assign Allowed Lists to voice terminals in your system refer to the Call Restrictions Allowed and Disallowed Lists Forms that you have filled out Then use the following procedures to assignor remove voice terminals for access to Allowed Lists 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial a and a 2 digit code 01 through 08 that corresponds to the list you want to assign to the voice terminal 3 Dial 00 The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button for each voice terminal to which this list is already assigned For example to assign List 2 to a voice terminal dial 0200 4 Perform one of the following procedures gt Touch the Auto Intercom button if you have one for the voice terminal for which you are giving access or remo
3. MERLIN Plus System Features 5 79 Hold DESCRIPTION When you need to put someone on hold use the Hold feature CONSIDERATIONS Before placing an intercom call on hold that has been answered using the HFAI feature lift the handset or the call will be disconnected When you leave a call on hold for more than a minute your voice terminal rings at one minute intervals to remind you the call is still on hold You can program an Exclusive Hold button so that no other voice terminal can pick up a call you ve put on hold For more information about the Exclusive Hold feature see the entry for Hold Exclusive in this section If a caller placed on hold hangs up the system will automatically drop the line If the light continues to flash after a caller has hung up the Hold Disconnect Interval may be too long 450 milliseconds for the local telephone company to detect See Hold Disconnect Interval for information to correct this problem ADMINISTRATION None PROGRAMMING None HOW TO USE To place a call on hold 1 Ifthe call was answered using the HFAI feature lift the handset 2 Touch Hold Sa When you put a call on hold the green light next to the call s line button flashes rapidly If someone else puts a call on hold from another voice terminal the green light flashes slowly next to the call s line button on your voice terminal To take a call off hold 1 Touch the call s line button
4. wee ann aon sean T o P T aes ane wae Ban Administ ees BEB Sua aes a sen sas nnu aar 80 month day year o Te P Administer C Ea D a To set the current time 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 81 3 Dial two digits for the hour 00 through 23 4 Dial two digits for the minute 00 through 59 For example if the time is 2 16 A M dial 810216 if the time is 2 16 P M dial 81 14 16 5 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 6 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position aan aun ass T eP oO PET aan nun B z Administer E sus nas sun _ 81 hour minute E Administer D T e P ECE lt m MERLIN Plus System Features 5 45 5 46 Control Unit Jack Assignment for the Call Report Feature To specify the voice terminal jack to which the data collector and the printer will be connected NOTE The system is factory set for jack 19 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 82 The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button that corresponds with the jack to which the data collector and the printer are currently assigned 3 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the jack to which the data collector and printer are currently assigned The green light goes off n
5. f p a f i Conference Transfer a Drop a Hold i 6 6 Accessory Equipment Basic Telephone and Modem Interface 2 DESCRIPTION The Basic Telephone and Modem Interface 2 BTMI 2 allows you to connect most types of telephone and data devices to your MERLIN Plus system including auto dial modems facsimile machines credit phones and the MERLIN Attendant See Figures 6 2 and 6 3 FIGURE 6 2 The Basic Telephone and Modem Interface 2 voicea PATA FTRANS A TEL DEVICE MODE TIMER FIGURE 6 3 A basic telephone connected to a BTMI 2 MERLIN Plus control unit Line jack Tel device 00000 I 00000 4 Pair 2 Pair modular cord modular cord Accessory Equipment 6 7 CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE 6 8 Accessory Equipment The BTMI 2 works with Touch Tone and rotary telephones None If you do not want the basic telephone to ring on every line you can specify which lines ring when a call comes in using Ringing Options and programming the lines for immediate or no ring See Ringing Options in this section You can also specify the order of lines for the phone by programming an Automatic Line Selection sequence Be sure to program Automatic Line Selection only for those lines to be used by the basic telephone See hntorialio Tine Selection in thia seorion Basic telephones are able to receive ringing intercom calls but not intercom calls
6. 1 Touch System Answer Green light on SA on Green light off SA off Green light flashing Problem with SA o System fo Answer If the green light next to the System Answer button is flashing notify the system administrator who should refer to Section 7 Troubleshooting fto correct the problem 5 10 MERLIN Plus System Features Auto Answer All DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING NOTE This feature requires a General Purpose Adapter and can be used with a modem an answering machine a facsimile machine or a cordless telephone If you want an optional piece of equipment such as a modem an answering machine or a facsimile machine connected to your voice terminal to turn on automatically when you receive ringing calls you need to program an Auto Answer All button You cannot have both the Auto Answer All and Auto Answer Intercom features activated at the same time If you have a Hands Free Unit HFU and Auto Answer All is activated all incoming calls will be answered at once This feature only answers ringing incoming calls It will not answer voice announced calls You should program Voice Announcement Disable on your voice terminal if you want all your incoming calls to ring See Voice Announcement Enable Disable later in this section for more information None Program the Auto Answer All feature on a button with lights To program an Auto Answer All b
7. Please hold 2 Please hold your call will be handled momentarily NOTE Ifa line number is administered using 50 the following message is appended to the end of message 1 and 2 You have reached where is a number entered by the system administrator for Call Forwarding Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Slide the T P switch to P and touch Administer Dial 76 plus the ASA feature number 1 DXD 2 CF 3 RLA 4 SA Dial the number of rings between 0 and 9 before the ASA feature picks up the call NOTE If the number of rings is set to 0 the voice terminal will not ring and the calls will be immediately answered Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position Enter administration mode Dial 10 followed by the desired template 1 Clear template 2 Dialer template 3 Feature template 4 Receptionist Secretary template Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the voice terminal being assigned the template Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Quick Reference Guide to System Administration 3 47 Quick Reference Guide to Administration Codes Administration Code Other Numbers Buttons Feature 01 through 08 00 01 through 10 plus up to eight telephone number digits Add or remove
8. Section 1 Introduction Section 2 Planning the System Line Assignments Form 2 9 MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms 2 25 Section 3 Administering the System Introduction 3 1 Administration Preview 3 2 Basic Administration 3 10 Section 4 Using The Attendant Console Handling Calls 4 4 Section 5 Reference MERLIN Plus System Features 5 1 Quick Reference Guide to MERLIN Plus Features 5 166 Quick Reference Guide to Using the ASA Features 5 170 Quick Reference Guide to Using the Programming Codes 5 171 Section 6 Accessory Equipment Answering Machines 6 2 Basic Telephones 6 4 Basic Telephone and Modem Interface 2 6 7 6 9 Supplemental Alert Adapter SAA 6 23 Section 7 Troubleshooting the System Troubleshooting Procedures 7 1 System Test 7 13 Section 8 Installation Section 1 Introduction FCC Notification and Repair Information INTERFERENCE This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if INFORMATION NOTICE not installed and used in accordance with the instructions in this manual may cause interference to radio communications The equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to Subpart J or Part 15 of FCC Rules which are designed to provide reasonable protection against such interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment Operating this equipment in a residential area is likely
9. 5 Repeat the procedure for each line you are administering 6 Touch Administer 7 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode Remote Line Access RLA If there is an I entered in this row perform the following procedure to administer the incoming Remote Line Access line group 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 54 for the Remote Line Access incoming line group 3 Touch the line buttons until the green lights show the assignments you want line is assigned to RLA line is not assigned to RLA Green light on Green light off 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode If you entered a number other than 2 in the Ring Interval column for RLA follow the procedure below to change the ring interval for incoming RLA calls 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 763 plus the number of rings 0 through 9 NOTE If 0 is selected the voice terminal will not ring and calls will be answered immediately 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode To use RLA you must assign a 5 digit password the first two digits are the caller s intercom number to gain access to the system from a remote location You also need this password when changing the c
10. 123 Call Forward Destination Number You can enter or change the telephone number where you want calls forwarded the CF destination number in either of two ways e Follow the first procedure below to enter or change the CF destination telephone number from the administrator attendant console with the system in administration mode e Follow the second procedure below to enter or change the CF destination telephone number from a phone outside the system with the system in CF mode 5 36 MERLIN Plus System Features From the Administrator Atfendant Console To enter change or delete the CF destination telephone number from the administrator attendant console follow this procedure 1 Press CF DXD to go into normal mode Green and red lights go off 2 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 3 Dial 53 4 Perform the appropriate step below gt To enter or change a CF destination telephone number dial the new number gt To remove the current CF destination number without replacing it with another number touch Administer 5 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 6 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position Top E cFoxo O e E Administer CJ To Add Change T P c p Administer E _ pe O Administer To Delete I a From Outside the System To enter or change the C
11. CONSIDERATIONS Allowed Lists help you control the cost of your monthly phone bill but still allow you to place all the business calls you need from any voice terminal in your system The administrator may decide to stem one or more System Speed Dial codes with Restriction Override All voice terminals in the system can use those codes as a type of password that allows the person to dial certain outside numbers Those numbers may be called regardless of toll or outward call restrictions previously placed on a voice terminal See System Speed Dial The system administrator can establish eight Allowed Lists for the system They are numbered 01 through 08 and each can have a maximum of 10 entries numbered 01 through 10 Each entry may consist of a toll prefix if necessary 1 or 0 an area code for example 201 and or an exchange code for example 834 and or emergency numbers for example 911 When the administrator has dialed the maximum eight digits for an Allowed List entry the system beeps twice to remind the administrator that he or she cannot dial any more digits If the administrator dials fewer than eight digits the system does not beep ADMINISTRATION If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information Before you administer Allowed Lists for your system refer to the Allowed List Form that you have filled out To setup an Allowed List 1 Enter administration mode by sliding t
12. You can have up to three paging groups The Page All group consists of all voice terminals in the system groups 1 and 2 can have up to 20 voice terminals in each group If necessary one voice terminal can be assigned to more than one paging group You can program buttons for the groups you want to page Or you can save available feature buttons for other uses and use a dial code for this feature If someone in the Group Page group picks up the handset during a Group Page announcement he or she is connected to the person making the announcement and the page announcement is terminated When someone in the MERLIN Plus system has activated the Voice Announcement Disable feature for his or her voice terminal he or she cannot hear a Group Page announcement If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information When the system is first set up the system has the following Group Page groups Group 1 voice terminals 10 through 19 Group 2 voice terminals 20 through 29 Page All voice terminals 10 through 29 If these group assignments are not satisfactory for the system the administrator can add or delete voice terminals from the individual groups The Page All group the paging group containing all the voice terminals in the system cannot be administered Before you begin to administer Group Page groups refer to Paging Groups on your System Configuration Form Then use one of the f
13. for instructions to stop the flashing light for administering the ASA jack The feature still doesn t work Contact your equipment supplier 7 12 Troubleshooting Procedures System Test If you are experiencing a problem other than those described in the previous tests try the following procedure before calling your equipment supplier SYMPTOM SYSTEM NOT Possible Cause 1 The control unit may need to be reset WORKING TROUBLE NOT PROCEDURES Remove the front cover see The trouble remains Go to Possible Cause 2 the MERLIN Plus Release 2 Installation Manual Set the control unit power switch to Off and then back to On Replace the front cover Possible Cause 2 A module may be loose WARNING Failure to comply with the following instructions may result in a risk of shock or damage to the equipment Do This Then Remove the front and top The trouble remains Contact your equipment cover see the MERLIN Pius supplier for assistance When Release 2 Installation calling your supplier Manual Set the control identify your system as unit power switch to Off MERLIN Plus R2 system Unplug all line cords and pull out each module and reinsert it so that it is securely seated in its slot Replace the top cover and fasten its screw Reconnect the line cords Set the power switch to On Replace the front cover In the Event of a Power Failure e The system administrator does no
14. y O using 4 7 with dial codes Index l 3 H Hands Free Answer on Intercom 5 78 with Auto Answer Intercom 5 13 headset 6 1 6 15 46 16 using headset adapter HFAI 5 79 5 166 button lig using voice terminal HFAI Mic button lig HoldJ5 in Personal Speed Dial with Outside Auto Dial with System Speed Dial 5 151 Hold Disconnect Interval 5 81 5 82 __ O administering 3 14 Hold Retrieve 5 85 H 5 86 5 166 5 171 Hold Exclusive l immediate ring See individual Voice Terminal Reports printout 5 146 intercom numbers numbers 11 through 29 button location of 3 25 0 call with Voice Announcement 5 87 5 157 222222 O Intercom 10 2 5 S O attendant s location system administration point 2 S _ S O J Jack 10 reserved for attendant console 19 designating for Call Report 3 43 Cd L Last Number Dial 5 89 with Saved Number Dial Last Number Redial lights 5 92 line A make private line assignments 3 24 3 32 0 sd customized for ASA Features 2 14 0 U U O for voice terminals 6 24 Line Assignments Form Line Bridging Adapter 6 24 line buttons with customized line assignments 3 24 E make private 3 38 operation button free line request 5 93 5 166 __ S O l 4 Index line ringing es line select 5 lines
15. Line D A i p Line A a a g L Intercom i a E Intercom Conference ai Transfer i Conference a Transfer Hl Drop p Hold E Hold A Hold ie BUYER CLERK OO Cc 3 m oo ees a T Line E FX line Bo o Line A Primary listed telephone number Q i E H Line B Second listed telephone number 3 Line C Third listed telephone number E E i Line D WATS line Line F Manager s personal line Oo E E m OW Oo OO O Line F j E m Intercom fi A Conference Transfer a Drop al Hold fa MANAGER UW 2 12 Line Assignments Form Original Line Assignments You can keep the original line assignments on the voice terminals of those people who need access to every outside line in the system In the Line columns to the right of each appropriate intercom number On the top row work 1 under Line A 2 under Line B and soon for as many lines as you have in your system Customized Line Assignments After you ve reviewed the responsibilities of the people in your business you can determine who needs customized line assignments In the Line columns to the right of each appropriate intercom number On the top row write a 1 for the line you want to appear on the first button a 2 for the line to appear on the second button and so on up to eight RINGING OPTIONS For each line that is assigned to a voice t
16. T P o i Administer D O Geea gunga muna o Auto m O Intercom o T P Administer 0 Ee MO PROGRAMMING Refer to the individual features in this section HOW TO USE Refer to the individual features in this section MERLIN Plus System Features 5 21 Auxiliary Lines DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS The MERLIN Plus system provides an auxiliary jack labeled AUX at the top of each Line Module This auxiliary line is bridged directly to outside Line A or Line E and does not go through the MERLIN Plus system control unit You can connect accessory devices to the system and use these devices independently of the system These devices include e Basic Telephones During an electrical power outage your MERLIN Plus system will not function However you can plug a basic telephone not a MERLIN Plus system voice terminal into the AUX jack and use it to place and receive calls on Line A or Line E e Facsimile Machines You can also plug a facsimile machine into the AUX jack When calls come in on Line A or Line E the FAX machine will respond to them as it would if plugged into any other outside telephone line e Modems and Computers You can plug a modem into the AUX line and use it for transmitting and receiving data on Line A or Line E The modem will function on this line as it would on any other outside telephone line When using a modem it is important that you prevent o
17. The lights are dim The speaker is locked on Possible Cause 2 Faulty voice terminal Do This Unplug the modular voice terminal cord from the malfunctioning voice terminal Plug the cord into a working voice terminal Slide its T P switch to the T position and hold it there If The same trouble appears on the working voice terminal The trouble does not appear on the working voice terminal The trouble is either the control unit the voice terminal or the cable connection Go to Possible Cause 2 The trouble is a faulty control unit or power supply Contact your equipment supplier for assistance The voice terminal T P switch is set to P with Program Mode Lock active Deactivate Program Mode Lock then set the T P switch to the center position Then The trouble is either in the control unit or the cables Plug the malfunctioning voice terminal into its original jack and go to Possible Cause 3 The malfunctioning voice terminal is faulty Contact your equipment supplier for assistance continued Troubleshooting Procedures 7 5 SYMPTOM A VOICE TERMINAL RINGS CONSTANTLY 7 6 Troubleshooting Procedures Possible Cause 3 Cable connections Do This Step 1 Go to the control unit and locate the intercom jack for the malfunctioning voice terminal and an intercom jack for a working voice terminal Unplug both from the control unit and replug each into the other
18. You can activate the System Answer feature with a System Answer button so that when selected calls come in the system automatically y answers them then plays a pre recorded message before placing them on hold This feature can only be activated from the attendant console or the alternate attendant console If your system has an alternate attendant the System Answer feature must be administered to that voice terminal To activate the System Answer feature 1 Touch System Answer The green light goes on O System m O Answer When Automatic System Answer ASA calls are not answered they normally return to the main attendant console However you may prefer to assign an alternate attendant position to handle just ASA calls all other calls are directed to the main attendant console The alternate attendant position is assigned by the system administrator If you are assigned the alternate attendant console you can do anything the main attendant can do except you cannot turn on message lights at voice terminals nor perform administration procedures from that console The only calls handled by the alternate attendant are returned ASA calls For example if a Direct Extension Dialing DXD call is unanswered or busy the call will be transferred to the alternate attendant console if one has been assigned If you have a heavy call handling load you may want to use a headset and headset adapter For more information about the head
19. 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 72 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position T P o m g _ Privacy J _ To suspend the Privacy feature TET unnu N eana T oP EE _ 1 Touch Privacy The green light next to the button goes off Privacy m 7 To activate the Privacy feature 1 If the green light next to Privacy is off touch the button The green light next to the button goes on MERLIN Plus System Features 5 113 Privacy on Lines A and E DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE The system administrator can administer the Privacy feature for Line A and or Line E so that no one in the system can bridge onto or monitor these lines while a device plugged into the Aux jack is off hook on Line A or Line E See Auxiliary Lines This feature is used for a modem facsimile machine or other equipment connected to the line through an auxiliary AUX jack on the control unit This Privacy must be administered and therefore is a different feature than the Privacy feature that people can program for their voice terminals If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P
20. Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the target voice terminal Touch Copy Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the source voice terminal Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial 69 Touch the line button of the incoming line that you want to change the hold disconnect interval Green light on the long 450 millisecond interval is selected Green light off the short 50 millisecond interval is selected continued 3 40 Quick Reference Guide to System Administration Administration Procedure Do This Assign System Speed Dial codes to telephone 1 Enter administration mode numbers and account numbers 2 Dial the code 60 through 89 or 900 through 999 you are assigning to the number 3 Dial either 90 to assign the code without Restriction Override 92 to assign the code with Restriction Override 88 to assign the code to an account number 4 Dial the telephone number or account number NOTE To designate a telephone number as private not printed on call reports dial before the number in step 4 If the telephone number or account number has the maximum allowed 16 digits the console beeps twice when you enter the sixteenth digit 5 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 6 Leave administration mode Assigning or re
21. Lucent Technologies Bell Labs Innovations MERLIN Plus COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEM Release 2 System Manual 999 507 148 Issue 3 August 1990 1990 AT amp T 999 507 148 All Rights Reserved Issue 3 Printed in U S A August 1990 NOTICE The information in this document is subject to change without notice Lucent Technologies assumes no responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document MERLIN is a registered trademark of Lucent Technologies To order copies of this document call the Lucent Technologies Customer Information Center 1 888 582 3688 and refer to document number 999 507 148 with your order Intellectual property related to this product including trademarks and registered to AT amp T Corporation has been transferred to Lucent Technologies Incorporated Any references within this text to American Telephone and Telegraph Corporation or AT amp T should be interpreted as references to Lucent Technologies Incorporated The exception is cross references to books published prior to December 31 1996 which retain their original AT amp T titles Lucent Technologies formed as a result of AT amp T s planned restructuring designs builds and delivers a wide range of public and private networks communication systems and software consumer and business telephone systems and microelectronic components The world renowned Bell Laboratories is the research and development arm for the company Contents
22. MERLIN Plus System Features 5 131 Send Message DESCRIPTION The system attendant can turn on the Message light at the voice terminals of people in the MERLIN Plus system in order to alert them that they have a message See Message CONSIDERATIONS The Message light at voice terminals in the system can only be turned on at the attendant administrator voice terminal The alternate attendant position cannot turn on the message light If your administrator attendant console is a BIS 22 with more than ten voice terminals on the system the attendant can still use the Send Message feature by following the directions below However he or she will not know if the light is already on at the voice terminal If you ve programmed Personal Speed Dial numbers such as LND or SND onto Auto Intercom buttons then you cannot use those buttons with the Send Message feature 5 Button voice terminals do not have a Message button ADMINISTRATION None PROGRAMMING None HOW TO USE From a BIS 34 Console If you are using a BIS 34 console use the following procedure to turn on the message light at a voice terminal 1 At the administrator attendant voice terminal touch Send Message 2 Touch the Auto Intercom button for the person s voice terminal The red ligh next to the Auto Intercom button goes on indicating the person s Message light is on NOTE To turn off the light repeat the steps E Susan 15 o o Send m o Me
23. these groups as they are or you can change the makeup of Paging Groups 1 and 2 during system administration to fit the needs of your business You can assign as few or as many voice terminals as you want to Groups 1 and 2 You can also assign the same voice terminal to both groups Under Paging Groups Check the appropriate column s next to the intercom number name and location of each person to indicate the Paging Group s you plan to assign the person to Templates There are four voice terminal templates designed to make administration of voice terminal features easier The four templates are the Clear Template Dialer Template Feature Template and the Receptionist Secretary Template The Clear Template is used to erase previous voice terminal features so that new features can be assigned The Dialer Template is for personnel who do not require special phone features and aren t likely to need to make toll calls The Feature Template is for managers and owners who need unrestricted phone use along with special additional features The Receptionist Secretary Template is for receptionists secretaries and backup call handlers who process several calls See Voice Terminal Templates in Section 5 Reference for more details Under Template on the Voice Terminal form Write a 1 if you want to assign the Clear Template to a voice terminal and erase any features currently assigned to that
24. JERR E A S RLA SA CF Call Forwarding DXD Direct Extension Dialing RLA Remote Line Access SA System Answer 2 30 MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms Call Restrictions Form Disallowed List Entry Form List 09 Item Number 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Allowed Lists Entry Form List 01 List 02 Item Number Item Number 01 01 02 02 03 03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 07 08 08 09 09 10 10 continued MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms 2 31 List 03 List 04 Item Number Item Number 01 01 02 02 03 03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 07 08 08 09 09 10 10 List 05 List 06 Item Number Item Number 01 01 02 02 03 03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 07 08 08 09 09 10 10 List 07 List 08 Item Number Item Number 01 01 02 02 03 03 04 04 05 05 06 06 07 07 08 08 09 09 10 10 2 32 MERLIN Plus System Planning Form continued Intercom Number 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 Disallowed List Call Restrictions Assignment Form Unrestricted Toll Restricted Outward MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms 04 05 Allowed Lists Assigned Restricted 01 06 07 08 2 33 2 34 MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms System Speed Dial Form Dial Code 60 ce
25. Look at the Paging Groups columns on the System Configuration Form If you plan to keep intercoms 10 through 19 in Page Group 1 and the remaining intercoms in Page Group 2 you don t have to do anything here If you plan to change the makeup of the paging groups follow the procedure below 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict Dial 71 for Page Group 1 or 72 for Page Group 2 If you have the corresponding Auto Intercom buttons a green light goes on next to each one that already is assigned to that paging group Perform one of the following procedures gt Touch the appropriate Auto Intercom button s The green light goes on gt Dial a code from the Dial Code chart located earlier in this section under Using the BIS 22 Voice Terminal as an Administrator Console that corresponds with the voice terminal Touch Administer The console beeps twice Follow steps 2 through 4 for each paging group you want to administer Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode Basic Administration 3 17 VOICE TERMINAL TEMPLATES 3 18 Basic Administration If you have entered a number 1 through 4 under the Template column of your Voice Terminal form use the following procedure to assign the template to the voice terminal 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict Dial 10 followed by the
26. The green light becomes steady 5 80 MERLIN Plus System Features Hold Disconnect Interval DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION Telephone company central offices use either a short 50 millisecond or a long 450 millisecond disconnect interval Because most switching systems use along interval your MERLIN Plus system is factory set for a long interval If your telephone company uses a short interval or if your MERLIN Plus system has been reprogrammed the disconnect interval for your system may cause problems with held calls If your system has either of the following problems the system administrator must change the Hold Disconnect Interval e Ifa caller waiting on hold is disconnected the disconnect interval setting of your MERLIN Plus system is shorter than the setting at your local telephone company s central office e Ifa caller waiting on hold hangs up but the light next to that line continues to flash as if the call was still on hold the disconnect interval setting of your MERLIN Plus system is longer than the setting at your local telephone company s central office You can perform a quick test to see if you need to change the interval from 450 milliseconds to 50 milliseconds Make an outside call to someone who would be willing to help you for a few minutes Ask them to hang up the phone ten seconds after you put them on hold When they re ready put the call on hold If the call is
27. The red lights next to the line buttons go on steady The green lights next to the line buttons begin flashing The console rings every 5 seconds to remind you that it s in programming mode 2 Touch Administer The red lights go on steady next to Administer and Restrict All other lights go off and the ringing stops NOTE If you are performing several of these procedures in one administration session you don t have to leave administration mode after each one Simply dial the appropriate code or touch the appropriate button to begin the next procedure When you finish administering the system leave administration mode as follows 1 Slide the T P switch to the center position 2 Change any voice terminal telephone button labels and any entries on forms or directories to reflect the administration or programming changes you ve made dialing Enter administration mode Dial the appropriate code 36 for toll prefix dialing 37 for area code only dialing Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode dialing Enter administration mode Dial the appropriate code 38 for Touch Tone dialing 39 for rotary pulse dialing Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode continued Quick Reference Guide to System Administration 3 37 Make Line A and or Line E Private Customize line assignments to a telephone Specify number of lines in
28. an Allowed List 1 through 8 to a voice terminal Add telephone numbers to an Allowed List 1 through 8 09 00 Add or remove a Disallowed List to a voice terminal 01 through 10 plus up to 20 telephone Add telephone numbers to a Disallowed List number digits 2 0 through 9 rings Set the Transfer Return Interval for 0 through 9 rings 4 0 through 8 lines Assign the number of lines in the system 10 plus template option Assign a template to a voice terminal 1 Clear 2 Dialer 3 Feature 4 Receptionist Secretary and intercom number the line button s for the line s on R instate 1eatnetion which you want to reinstate restriction a l 13 Set Music on Hold to low volume IA Set Music on Hold to medium volume the default setting 15 Set Music on Hold to high volume 16 Turn off background music Set background music to low volume Set background music to medium volume the default setting Set background music to high volume 30 1 to turn on the Call Forwarding Enable or disable the voice message on one or more lines voice message in your CF and or DXD incoming line groups 0 to turn off the Call Forwarding voice message 31 Set a line for immediate ring on a voice terminal with Button Free Line Operation 32 Set a line for no ring on a voice terminal with Button Free Line Operation 34 Reassign lines to a voice terminal that has Button Free Line Operation 35 Set th
29. and backup call handlers including the system attendant CONSIDERATIONS Both the Receptionist Secretary template and the Features template require a 22 button or larger voice terminal Features such as Voice Announcement Enable Disable and Personalized Ring previously administered to a voice terminal still apply even though they do not appear on the templates Unless Program Mode Lock is on an individual can choose to reprogram different features over the features provided on the template ADMINISTRATION To administer one of the four templates onto a voice terminal 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 10 followed by the option number of the template 1 Clear template 2 Dialer template 3 Feature template 4 Receptionist Secretary template 5 164 MERLIN Plus System Features 3 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the target voice terminal The console beeps twice after each voice terminal is administered a template NOTE Label the target voice terminal with the lines and features provided by the assigned template 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Continue to administer the templates to voice terminals or leave administration mode znl safis o Administer m ea o Intercom o oO T gt P o Administer o OE lt _ PROGRAMMING None HOW TO USE Refer to Section 3 Administration unde
30. e Automatic Line Selection sequences e The lines and features assigned to all buttons on the voice terminal Figure 5 3 shows a printout of a typical SFR The System Feature Report feature can be accessed only from the administrator attendant console If the system administrator wants to have the date and time on the System Feature Report the administrator can set these options on the control unit when he or she administers the date and time for the Call Report feature See Call Report The system administrator can connect the data collector and the printer to any voice terminal jack in the system except jack 10 However if the printer and data collector have already been assigned to a voice terminal jack for the Call Report feature usually jack 19 it is best to use the same jack assignment for the System Feature Report 5 142 MERLIN Plus System Features FIGURE 5 3 A printo MISCELLANEOUS 1 MUSI C ON HO 3 BACKGROUND TRANSFER RE 4 LONG DISTA 5 DIAL SIGNA 6 CALL REPORT 7 TYPE OF CA AUTO SYSTEM AC 1 CALL 2 CALL 3 10388 20000 REMOTE LINE 11999 21000 A l LLOWED LIST X in list List Entries ICOM N 10 LIST 1 X X 976 NOTE FORWARD ANNOUNCEMENT FORWARD TELEPHONE not are ut of a typical System Feature Report SYSTEM ADMINISTRATION OPTI ONE Data 04 01 89 Time 05 55 45 FEATURES D VOLUME IS MEDIUM 14 MUSIC VOLU
31. following codes 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial one of the following codes to set the volume you prefer gt Dial 16 to turn off the background music gt Dial 17 to set the volume to low gt Dial 18 to set the volume to medium gt Dial 19 to set the volume to high 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position Accessory Equipment 6 19 PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE 6 20 Accessory Equipment Administration procedures for CO line connection 1 Slide the T P switch to P and touch Administer 2 Dial 91 3 Touch the button for the line you want to be the paging port Green light on line added to paging port Green light off line removed from paging port 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position Refer to Loudspeaker Page earlier in this section Using the Loudspeaker Paging System connected to the Page Jack To use the Loudspeaker Page button 1 Touch Loudspeaker Page 2 When you hear the beep lift your handset and make your announcement To use this feature dialing a code 1 Touch Intercom 2 Lift your handset 3 Dial 6 4 When you hear the beep make your announcement The loudspeaker will turn off automatically when you hang up Using the Loudspeaker Paging System conn
32. gt Touch the Auto Intercom button of the voice terminal you want to restrict gt Dial the intercom number of the voice terminal you want to restrict 3 Touch Restrict until the green light next to it shows the kind of call restriction you want the voice terminal to have Unrestricted all talk permitted Toll restricted local and intercom calls only Outward restricted intercom calls only Steady green light on Flashing green light Green light off 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode For restricted voice terminals if there is a check mark in one or more of the Allowed List Assigned columns do the following 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict Dial a and a two digit code 01 through 08 that corresponds to the list you checked off to assign to the voice terminal Dial 00 The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button for each voice terminal that has been assigned this list Perform one of the following procedures gt Touch the Auto Intercom button for the voice terminal that you want to assign the list gt Use the appropriate code from the Dial Code chart earlier in this section under the heading Using the BIS 22 Voice Terminal as an Administrator Console for the voice terminal to which the allowed list is to be assigned Touch Administer The console be
33. m o m Administer 555 1234 an ae Administer a ae MERLIN Plus System Features 5 33 5 34 Voice Messages The system automatically provides the following default voice message for call forwarded calls Your call is being forwarded Please hold You can modify this message to include the following statement You have reached nnn where nnn is the telephone number of one of your outside lines The number can be up to 16 digits including or You can modify the message for all lines in an incoming line group or you can modify the message for some and leave others unmodified To modify the CF message for one or more lines in your incoming line groups do the following 1 To MERLIN Plus System Features Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer Dial 50 Touch the line button for the line on which you want the modified message The green light goes on Dial the telephone number you want to include in the message NOTE For special phone numbers such as an 800 number you may prefer to have the recorded voice say Eight hundred followed by the number instead of Eight zero zero In this case you would touch the Hold button to enter a pause after the toll prefix then again after the 800 area code and again after the exchange For example 1 800 555 1212 would be entered as follows 1 Hold 800 Hold 555 Hold 1212 Repeat for
34. s jack See if the trouble now occurs on the working voice terminal Step 2 Test each cable in the wiring run to the malfunctioning voice terminal by following this procedure a Connect the wiring run to a functioning voice terminal b Replace the first cable in the wiring run with one known to be working Possible Cause Voice terminal T P switch isn t in the Do This Check T P switch position The trouble occurs on the previously working voice terminal The trouble no longer occurs on the working voice terminal The trouble still occurs The problem is caused by your control unit Call your equipment supplier for assistance The trouble is caused by a cable there may be more than one in the wiring run to the malfunctioning voice terminal However check the previous two causes for this symptom first If the problem persists go on to Step 2 of this cause Check the connection if the connections are correct and secure remove the second cable in the wiring run and replace it with another cable that is known to work properly If the problem still occurs replace the third cable in the run and so on until all the cable in the run has been replaced If the problem still persists call your local equipment supplier for assistance The trouble no longer occurs If It is set at either T or P The T P switch is in the center position The cable was the source of the problem d
35. to cause interference in which case the user at his or her own expense will be required to do whatever is necessary to correct the interference FCC REGISTRATION AND This equipment is registered with the FCC in accordance with Part 68 of its REPAIR INFORMATION rules In compliance with the rules you are to be advised of the following 1 Means of Connection Connection of this equipment to the telephone network must be through a standard network interface jack USOC RJ11C or RJ14C or a multiline network interface cable and connector USOC R121 e Connection to off premises stations requires a USOC RJ2GX e This equipment must be ordered from your local telephone company e This equipment may not be used with party lines or coin telephone lines 2 Notification of the Local Telephone Company Before connecting this equipment you or your equipment supplier must notify your local telephone company s business office of the following e The telephone numbers you will be using with this equipment e The registration number for the MERLIN Plus system AS593M 13529 KF E e The ringer equivalent number REN for the MERLIN Plus system 0 8A You must also notify your local telephone company if and when this equipment is permanently disconnected from the lines 3 Installation and Operational Procedures The System Manual and the MERLIN Plus Installation Guide contain information about installation and operational procedures 4 Repair Instru
36. you may want to program on a button e When PBX Centrex or Custom Calling instructions tell you to include a switchhook flash you must touch Recall instead If you touch the switchhook you ll disconnect the call None MERLIN Plus System Features 5 105 PROGRAMMING To program an Outside Auto Dial button for your voice terminal 1 Label the button with a name and or a number 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 90 plus a telephone number or a PBX or Centrex code if you need to include a special character in the dialing sequence use the directions above 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position Bun TEE BER Ban T o gt P Home nan Bae B Office m uan BEE 90 tel no _ HOW TO USE To dial an outside number with one touch 1 Without touching Speakerphone or lifting your handset touch the Outside Auto Dial button for the number you want to dial Your voice terminal speaker goes on and you hear dialing 2 If you programmed the special character STOP in a dialing sequence after you hear the second dial tone touch the Outside Auto Dial button again to continue the dialing 3 When you hear the other person answer start speaking or lift your handset then start speaking Otome Oo oO Office If the line is
37. 5 133 administering jack assignment 3 16 ssid dial code using 4 7 administrator attendant console with 5 142 serial interface for data collector Call Report settings on 5 142 setting date cancel a report in progress See Call Report cancel all report requests setting time control unit jack assignment for Seal Rep 5 individual phone reports setting volume for background music individual voice terminal reports SMDR system and individual voice terminal reports See Call Report speaker 5 73 5 134 5 135 sd with Monitor on Hold with On Hook Dialing on voice terminals 2 7 speakerphone button light special characters in dialing sequences 5 105 5 109 5 136 5 137 setting date setting time 5 144 5 144 voice terminal jack 19 reserved for system planning the 2 1 system processing flowchart Switchhook flash 5 I37___ SSS S SCSSC C r Touch Tone Enable Transfer 5 137 O O OOOO SSS with System Speed Dial i speed dial setting for area code only speed dialcodesJ2 18 YS setting for toll prefix B 49 t lt CsCsi s lt lt 732C 3OW Station Message Detail Recording setting for Touch Tone dialing 3 49 See Call Reportf5 43 0 System Speed Dial 5 103 5 150 15 153 15 167 5 17 account number entr Stop character with Busy Buster 5 25 ____ o Z o o o O stop 5 136 code 5 3 5 4 5 150 assigned to telephone numbers 3 36 sd in Personal Speed
38. 5 220 using facsimile metus using modems with Privacy on im A and E 5 B Background Music set volume 3 13 3 48 3 42 J6 22 __ S O turn off 3 48 oo basic administration 3 10 43 23 _ o basic telephone 6 4 6 6 and Modem Interface 6 4 arid Modem Interface 2 6 7 46 8 ooo with auxiliary lines 5 22 _ 0 BIS speakerphone using BIS voice terminal 5 15 BIS 10 voice terminal 1 7 o description of limited use as are console pA not recommended as console BIS 22 voice terminal labels for 3 8 o as administrator attendant console as attendant console 4 1 4 3 oo administration restrictions administration with 3 3 o O description of using with Send Message 5 with Message 5 99 S BIS 22D voice terminal with displa ipti BIS 34 voice terminal labels for with Night Service 4 8 5 101 S description of 1 8 1 9 S as attendant console 3 4 4 1 4 2 o with displa bridging 5 24 Busy Buster 5 25 5 27 5 89 5 103 5 167 5 171 administering jack assignment 3 15 sisi designating a voice terminal jack for jack set control unit jack for unable to use 7 9 jack 19 reserved for busy tone 5 156 button functions change for administration 3 button label sheets for the administrator attendant console Button Free feature with copy 3 7 l 2 Index Button Free line operation cannot be bridged 5 24 5 28 cannot use conference with reassigning lines 3 48 _ S O setting imme
39. A and E assigning privacy tol3 49 ____ y O auxiliary jack bridged to 5 22___ ooo local exchange codes 2 20 ___ O oS local telephone company source of outside lines long distance area codes dialing on System Configuration com 2 2 depa loudspeaker page M manual signaling 5 15 5 97 button with Auto Intercom 5 15 MERLIN Plus 2 stem features message 5 995 169 SUS modem See also Auto Answer All with Auto Answer All and computers with auxiliary lines 5 22 ss with General Purpose Adapter Monitor on Hold 5 100 5 134 with Speaker Music on Hold 3 13 6 21 6 22 0 jack 6 21 setting volume turn off 3 48 N network interface ae Service aoe lt lt lt One Touch dialing Auto Intercom 5 103 Busy Buster 5 103 Last Number Dial 5 Outside Auto Dial 5 Saved Number Dial 5 System Speed Dial One Touch ee 4 4 on hook dialing with speaker 5 i original line assignments keeping on 10 buton voice terminals 2 on 22 button voice terminals on 34 button voice terminals 2 9 outgoing calls controlling iih i Outside Auto Dial 5 103 5 105 J5 106 5 167 5 171 7 2 button 5 105 with Saved Number DialJ 5 130 maximum number of characters 5 105 5 134 with speaker 5 134 with special characters 5 136 outside call 5 157 7 1L 47 3 15 93 o E outside t
40. Administer oj ELE Pm SEee A Gann MERLIN Plus System Features 5 29 PROGRAMMING None HOW TO USE If you do not have a line button for a call that you have received or that has been transferred to you you can still put the call on hold using the Hold button To retrieve the call you can use the Hold Retrieve feature See Hold Retrieve 5 30 MERLIN Plus System Features Call Forwarding CF DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS NOTE Call Forwarding is an ASA feature and therefore requires the assignment of the ASA jack If the ASA jack assignment has not yet been made refer to Automatic System Access in this section before attempting to administer this feature When in CF mode incoming calls on designated lines are connected to the Voice Synthesis Processor VSP then while the caller is listening to the message the control unit dials the telephone number where calls are being forwarded When the person at the CF number answers the system then uses the conferencing feature to connect the two calls and the call progresses normally You have the option to change the message or you can have calls forwarded without the message so that callers are unaware that their calls are being forwarded You can also change the call forwarding number from any Touch Tone phone Call Forwarding requires the following A programmed button with green and red lights labeled CF DXD You use the CF DXD but
41. All 76 Touch Tone Enable 77 Exclusive Hold 78 Ring Override 82 Account Number Entry 83 Call Forwarding Direct Extension Dialing 85 Call Pickup an intercom number Call Pickup with One Touch 88 an account number Account Number Entry with One Touch 90 a telephone number Outside Auto Dial 91 an intercom number Auto Intercom 70 All voice terminals Group Page 71 Group 1 72 Group 2 6 Loudspeaker Page 05 a 2 or 3 character System Speed Dial System Speed Dial programmed on a button code 60 89 900 999 05 Hold Retrieve Quick Reference Guide to Programming Codes 5 171 Section 6 Accessory Equipment Accessory Equipment Once you have set up your MERLIN Plus system you may decide to purchase additional hardware such as a headset that the system attendant can use for easier call handling or a basic telephone that is connected to the MERLIN Plus system and can be used off premises The information included in this section will help you decide what optional equipment you want to add to your system and how to use these accessories The information in the entry for each accessory is divided into six parts e Description The description of the accessory tells what it does and its advantages for the user e Drawings and Diagrams Drawings of the accessory and its parts are included for each piece of equipment along with any applicable diagrams showing how the equipment is connected to other MERLIN Plus system
42. Dial in System Speed Dial Codes assigning 2 23 B A COCOS O O with Outside Auto Dial 5 105 _ o O assigning to account numbers for account number entr with System Speed Dial 5 151_ assigning to outside telephone numbers Supplemental Alert Adapter 4 8 5 101 6 23 6 24 __ assigning to private outside telephone numbers 3 50 lt switchhook flash 5 136 6 4 SS y O assigning with Restriction Override to outside in Personal Speed Dial 5 109 telephone numbers 3 51 in System Speed Dial Codes 2 23 0 Z OZ O Z O Z O Y O assigning with Restriction Override to private outside with Outside Auto Dial 5 105 _ __ SS O telephone numbers 3 51 ees with Recall 5 12000 maximum number of digits with System Speed Dial 5 I51 printed on Call Report b4 lt with Conference 5 52 5 72 C CC with Restriction Override 2 20 5 6 System Administration Report printout with account number entr System Administrator 1 4 description of System Answer numbers on System Feature Report option administering with account number entr System Answer Button with Call Report 5 44 using 5 170 Sith Restriction Override system components description of 3 2 _ Z o Z o wt special characters 5 136 O O O O O System Speed Dial Form 2 1 2 23 2 24 2 35 3 36 5 4_ system test 7 1 troubleshooting procedure systemwide options 5 142 l 6 Inde
43. Dialing DXD When you put the system in DXD mode the control unit connects incoming calls on designated lines to the VSP for a message Meanwhile the caller dials the extension number a 2 digit intercom number and the control unit transfers the call to that extension e System Answer SA When the attendant or the alternate attendant activates the System Answer button selected incoming calls are answered automatically and placed on hold The system administrator can choose to have the caller hear a special message before being placed on hold or if connected to a compatible audio source a pre recorded message or music can be played instead e Remote Line Access RLA When the system is in RLA mode you can call in from outside and use a password to gain access to one of the system s outside lines You can also use the RLA feature to change the telephone number to which calls are being forwarded during CF operation The VSP prompts you through the necessary procedures If your Central Office CO or PBX does not provide a forward disconnect on the serving lines you must use the Call Forwarding Remote Line Access Disconnect Timer to set a disconnect interval for CF and RLA All lines in the system must be assigned to the ASA port Refer to the individual features in this section for specific considerations for each feature ASA features work differently when used in conjunction with the MERLIN Attendant 5 20 MERLIN
44. Features ADMINISTRATION It is sometimes necessary to include a pause stop or switchhook flash or to switch from rotary to Touch Tone signals within a dialing sequence To do so the administrator must enler one or more of the following special characters into the dialing sequence However if you do use the special characters in the dialing sequence you cannot use Recall to retry the number for you e To program a pause touch Hold e To program a stop touch Drop e To program Touch Tone Enable touch Transfer e To program a switchhook flash at the beginning of a dialing sequence touch Recall and then touch Hold NOTE If the first digit of a System Speed Dial number is the special character Recall follow it by a pause also a special character when programming the dial sequence If you need to use Recall in other than the first digit of the dialing sequence of a System Speed Dial number you cannot use the Speed Dial feature For more information about using special characters in a dialing sequence including PBX Centrex and Custom Calling features see Special Characters If a number to which the administrator assigns a System Speed Dial code contains a character the character must be entered twice For example O 123 A single character ends administration of the current Speed Dial code When the administrator has dialed the maximum 16 characters for a System Speed Dial code the syst
45. LC UO Joni Basic Administration 3 21 Option 4 Receptionist Secretary Template This template is for receptionists secretaries and backup call handlers including the system attendant and is designed for use with 22 button or larger voice terminals See Figure 3 7 for button assignments FIGURE 3 7 The Receptionist Secretary Template F oct 34 Button a 22 Button TY 10 Button Line D i Line H i E Al 19 i Al 29 Line C al Line G i m Al 18 E UW OW Al 28 OU OL UL OU OU OL O Al 27 Line B E Line F g Al 17 E Line A a Line E E Q Intercom BB Al 15 Al 25 Al 14 A Al 24 i Conference ie Transfer i ii Al 23 i Drop p Hold i Oo Co Co Cv Al 26 OO 2 a i CL OO UW m i E Oo DD p Al 22 p E E Al 20 p LND J Page All E Eeen E OO Oc CL Cu 2 gt Sl ss z gt OU 2 3 on z o 4 ie U 5 E m 3 22 Basic Administration PROGRAM MODE LOCK If you placed a check mark in the Lock column of the Voice Terminal form you want to prevent the voice terminal from reprogramming any of the features assigned to it Use the procedure below to prevent the user of a voice terminal from reprogramming any of the features assigned to it 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 89 3 Perform one of the followin
46. Only if you do not have to dial a toll prefix 1 or 0 before the area code when you dial the telephone number for a long distance call TRANSFER RETURN Initially when someone in the MERLIN Plus system transfers a call and it is not INTERVAL answered in four rings the call returns to the sender You can change that setting so that calls don t return or return after up to nine rings Under Transfer Return Interval Check No Return if you don t want transferred calls to return to the originator if the call is unanswered Check ___ Rings then fill in a number between 1 and 9 depending on the number of times you want a transferred call to ring before it s returned to the originator The following three features Call Report Music on Hold and Background Music require optional equipment If your business is not using these features skip these discussions and continue with Outside Telephone Lines CALL REPORT Call Report also called Station Message Detail Recording SMDR enables businesses to keep records of incoming and outgoing calls This optional feature requires a MERLIN PLUS system data collector and an AT amp T 475 476 or 572 573 printer or its equivalent The Call Report feature gives you information in a report that is printed automatically as calls occur The report includes the date and time of each call its duration the number dialed if the call is outgoing and the line and
47. Plus System Features ADMINISTRATION If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information ASA Jack Assignment The Automatic System Access features require a dedicated jack on the control unit into which you can plug one end of the Auto Access cord The cord also plugs into the memory module where the Voice Synthesis Processor VSP is located The VSP provides taped messages to callers when ASA features are being used At startup jack 18 is automatically assigned to ASA To change the assignment use the following procedures NOTE You cannot assign jack 19 usually assigned to Busy Buster and or Call Report unless you have reassigned the jack for these features 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 59 The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button of the jack assigned to ASA 3 Perform one of the following procedures gt Touch the Auto Intercom button for the jack you want to assign to ASA The green light goes off next to the button for the old number and the green light goes on next to the button for the new number If you hear a denial tone the feature is on or the VSP port is active Either wait or turn off the feature gt Dial the intercom number of the voice terminal you want to assign to ASA 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position
48. Report The green light goes off next to the old Auto Intercom button and the green light goes on next to the newly assigned Auto Intercom button gt Dial the intercom number of jack you re assigning to System Feature Report 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode Assigning an Alternate Attendant position 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 79 3 Perform one of the following procedures gt Touch the Auto Intercom button of the voice terminal you want to assign as the Alternate Attendant position gt Dial the intercom number of voice terminal you re assigning for the Alternate Attendant 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode PAGING GROUPS When you filled in the Paging Groups columns on the System Configuration Form you learned the following about paging groups All voice terminals are automatically assigned to a single paging group the Page All Group which you cannot change Intercoms 10 through 19 are automatically assigned to Page Group 1 intercoms 20 through 29 are automatically assigned to Page Group 2 You can assign the same voice terminal to both paging groups If you are using a BIS 10 or a BIS 22 voice terminal you must administer the Group Page feature in a slightly different way
49. The available codes are 60 through 89 and 900 through 999 Each stored number can have up to 16 characters including any of the following special characters e P for pause e R for a switchhook flash Recall e S for stop e T for Touch Tone enable See the Special Characters in Dialing Sequences Jentry in Section 5 Reference to find out how to use these special characters You can identify private numbers that you do not want to appear on displays or print on Call Reports by entering a before the number on the System Speed Dial Form Then voice terminal displays and Call Report printouts will show the System Speed Dial code instead of the number In the Private column on the System Speed Dial form Put a star in front of those numbers you want to mark for privacy when you administer the system When you enter a star before the telephone number the number will not appear on displays or print on Call Reports See System Speed Dial in Section 5 Reference for more information on Call Reports System Speed Dial Forms 2 23 NUMBER AND IDENTIFICATION RESTRICTION OVERRIDE 2 24 System Speed Dial Forms In the Number column on the System Speed Dial form Write the telephone numbers or account numbers you want to encode on the line containing the dial codes 60 61 62 etc of your choice Put a check mark in the telephone column if the number is a telephon
50. Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset 2 Dial the first part of the number 3 Touch Touch Tone Enable 4 Dial the remaining numbers o Touch o o Tone Enbl no Speaker O _ phone a 5 158 MERLIN Plus System Features Touch Tone or Rotary Setting DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE When the MERLIN Plus system is installed it is set to generate Touch Tone signals If any of the system s lines are rotary the administrator must reset the system to rotary dialing by entering a code at the administrator attendant console If your system has any rotary lines you should select the rotary setting for the system then program a Touch Tone Enable button which can be activated when you are using your Touch Tone lines See Touch Tone Enable If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information To set your system for rotary dialing 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 39 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position Bag T P o BEE J T P ELI go Administer m aon J Administer m OE 39 _ If you need to reset the system for Touch Tone dialing 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dia
51. _ _Co22 Buttton ns 10 Button m 5 Button Line D it a Line H A Line g i Line G B p Line B a E Line F a al Line A Al l Line E E a Intercom i Conference a Transfer a Drop E Hold Bi Oo co Oo oo co Eai TT mee ae Ob Uv DO 7 i i J ji i 2 10 Line Assignments Form MERLIN Plus system line administration offers you these options e Customize the line assignments on some or all of your voice terminals e Keep the original line assignments on some or all of your voice terminals The following paragraphs offer guidelines for choosing a line assignment option for each voice terminal and recording your choices on the form Guidelines for Choosing Line Assignment Options As you decide whether to keep the original line assignments or customize the line assignments on one or more voice terminal review your business calling patterns and each person s telephoning responsibilities You may find that by customizing line assignments you can help control costs and increase the efficiency of your communications system Let s say for example that you are the MERLIN Plus system administrator for a branch office of a large company Your system has six outside telephone lines e Lines A B and C are local general purpose lines with your office s published telephone numbers They re listed first second and third respectively in dire
52. a 2 e S Private Number Check one Name Restriction Override Telephone Account e E e ee ee ee ee fea OT e S T G E 5 woo P S e T y 7 e S T S E OS E O E o a E S Do ea en Ae af a a a a eeh ooo e O E o aB es Hs 75 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 87 88 89 900 901 902 903 904 905 906 907 908 909 oo Q a aN an A continued MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms 2 35 Dial Check one Restriction Code Private Number Telephone Account Name Override 910 Semen _ re coms f__Soe _f_ Overs 1913 a Too y 912 o eS i 913 E l 914 OOo O O y y y 915 ee Te ee 916 oe Ee 917 a e e ee 918 Oooo o o T e y 919 Oooo o o T e y 920 Oooo o S T S 921 Oooo o o 922 ee is 923 O ee 924 ee o o T e y y 702 ee oo 26 Oooo o y y 927 e2 ooo o d o e e y 929 o o e S T S y 30o FT E a a poaz looo o o o T e 933 J o d S o e p 3 ooo o o o T e 935 oo oo o S S o y y 936 tae E o e o e DG o y GO o o y 940 oaoa oo o o o o o y 943 p 9 o o d o o y Pugs ooo o o o o y 946 97 o o o o o y y BEE 949 continued 2 36 MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms Dial Code 950 951 952 953 954 955 956 957 958 959 960 961 962 963 964 65 966 967 968 969 970 971 972 973 974 975 976 977 978 979 980 981 98
53. alert device to a Supplemental Alert Adapter see Supplemental Alert Adapter under Accessory Equipment so that each time a call comes in an extra alert device goes on None 5 40 MERLIN Plus System Features PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE You do not need to program Option A To program Option B 1 Label the button Call Pickup 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 85 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position eas T P o call aan T P a aan mI g Pickup o aos ELE rmai 85 _ To program Option C 1 Label the button Call Pickup plus an intercom number 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 85 plus an intercom number 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position gua BEG T P o call nan ena Te P a BaN See E j o cee coe gt _ 85 Icom no _ You can use a programmed button or a dial code to pick up an intercom or outside call at any other voice terminal in the system To pickup a call ringing at any other voice terminal using Option A 1 Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset 2 Dial 3 3 Dial the intercom n
54. busy or if no one answers 1 Touch Speakerphone or hang up to cancel the call Speaker o phone 5 5 106 MERLIN Plus System Features Personal Lines DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION When the system administrator assigns lines to voice terminals he or she can select lines that will serve as personal lines for individuals in the business such as the president of the company No one else has these lines on his or her voice terminal Calls that come in on these personal lines will not ring at other voice terminals or at the attendant s console A secretary can cover calls that come in on his or her boss personal line by having the line assigned to his or her own voice terminal and programming the line for immediate ring A secretary can screen calls that come in on the personal line by programming the line on the boss voice terminal to delayed ring or no ring and programming the line at his or her own voice terminal for immediate ring See Ringing Options If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information To assign a personal line to a voice terminal 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the voice terminal to which you want to assign a personal line A green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button Green lights also go on next to the butt
55. console For more information on this feature see Centralized Programming 4 Program this substitute telephone for Voice Announcement Disable a Slide the T P switch to P b Touch the Intercom button until the green light next to it goes off Accessory Equipment 6 5 5 If you want to change the order in which the system selects available lines for this telephone assign an Automatic Line Selection sequence a While in programming mode dial b Touch the line buttons in the order you want them to be selected c When you are finished programming the basic telephone slide the T P switch to the center position 6 If you want the basic telephone not to ring on specified lines use the Ringing Options feature While in programming mode touch the line for which you want to program a ringing option a If you don t want the phone to ring dial 35 b If you want the phone to ring immediately when a call comes in dial 37 7 Disconnect the substitute voice terminal and connect the BTMI to the same voice terminal jack Then connect the basic telephone to the BTMI PROGRAMMING None HOW TO USE A person using a basic telephone must dial the codes shown in Figure 6 1 to access the lines the system administrator assigns to the intercom number for the telephone FIGURE 6 1 Basic telephone codes for accessing lines A A da z o co co mo ae i ifr foe ma a amp N 886
56. deactivate it as soon as your business day begins The Call Forwarding Remote Line Access Disconnect Timer should be used in conjunction with CF if your Central Office CO does not provide a forward disconnect signal to your MERLIN Plus system See Call Forwarding Remote Line Access Disconnect Timer in this section ADMINISTRATION If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information Call Forwarding Line Groups At startup none of the system s outside lines are assigned to the CF incoming or outgoing line group To use this feature you must assign line s to each group NOTE To use Call Forwarding with the MERLIN Attendant you should have one outgoing line for each incoming line in every Call Forwarding line group 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial the code for the type of line group list you want to administer gt CF incoming line group dial 51 Green light on line is assigned to the group Green ligh off line is not assigned to the group gt Fora CF outgoing line group dial 52 Green light on line is assigned to the group Green light off line is not assigned to the group 3 Touch the line buttons until the green lights show the makeup you want for the line group 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position T P az Ease a
57. digits For example 911 is a multipurpose emergency number in many areas Naming Allowed Lists Once you ve decided how many Allowed Lists you want and what numbers should be included in each you may want to identify each list by name for example New England Customers or Local Emergency Numbers in addition to the numbers that already appear on the form List 01 List 02 etc On the Allowed Lists Entry Form Write the name if any that you want to use to identify each list on the line next to the list s code number List 01 List 02 List 03 etc Creating Allowed Lists Under Number on the appropriate Allowed Lists Entry Form Write area codes local exchange codes emergency or other telephone numbers on the lines next to the Item numbers Assigning Allowed Lists Now that you ve created some Allowed Lists you should decide how you want to assign them to restricted voice terminals when you administer the system You ll need to refer to the Call Restrictions Assignment Form Under Allowed Lists Assigned on the Call Restrictions Assignment Form Put a check mark in the appropriate box representing the allowed lists that you want to assign to each voice terminal when you administer the system Keep your completed Call Restrictions Forms in a place where you can find it easily for system administration Call Restrictions Flow Chart The followin
58. done by the user at his or her own voice terminal each voice terminal s T P switch is unlocked The administrator attendant console connected to jack 10 cannot be locked out of program mode If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information To lock or unlock the programming function on an individual voice terminal 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 89 MERLIN Plus System Features 5 117 3 4 5 Perform one of the following procedures gt Touch the Auto Intercom button of the voice terminal that you are administering Green light on the voice terminal is locked Green light off programming can be done from the voice terminal gt If You don t have an Auto Intercom button for the voice terminal then use the corresponding dial code from the chart below If the intercom If the intercom number is Dial this code number is Dial this code Intercom 10 Intercom 20 03 Intercom 11 Intercom 21 04 Intercom 12 Intercom 22 05 Intercom 13 Intercom 23 06 Intercom 14 intercom 24 07 Intercom 15 Intercom 25 08 Intercom 16 Intercom 26 09 Intercom 17 Intercom 27 10 Intercom 18 Intercom 28 11 Intercom 19 Intercom 29 12 Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position Sug T ep g ssu Jg as ane Auto as go
59. for Allowed Lists The System Answer button programmed for the System Answer feature cannot be copied If attempted the corresponding button on the voice terminal you are copying to will be blank If you have a 5 button voice terminal you cannot copy any lines or feature onto a larger voice terminal or vice versa Except for the 5 button voice terminal the administrator can copy the lines and features from any small voice terminal onto a larger voice terminal If you are the system administrator you might want to copy the button assignments from a BIS 10 onto a BIS 22 voice terminal for example You can also copy from a large voice terminal to a smaller voice terminal However if you copy lines or features from a large voice terminal onto a smaller voice terminal such as from a BIS 34 to a BIS 22 the system copies only those lines and or features for which there are corresponding buttons on the smaller voice terminal For example in copying the lines and features from a BIS 34 voice terminal onto a BIS 22 voice terminal the system copies only those lines and or features assigned to the three left columns of buttons the first 22 buttons of the BIS 34 voice terminal The rightmost column of buttons on the BIS 34 voice terminal will not be copied onto the smaller voice terminal Be sure to label the buttons on the voice terminal to which lines or features have been copied If any voice terminal in the system is active on a call
60. from which you cannot make a call Unplug the line cord from the network interface and in its place plug in a basic Touch Tone or rotary telephone Do not use a MERLIN system voice terminal Try to place an outside call from the telephone The trouble appears on the basic telephone and the network interface uses a line adapter The trouble appears on the basic telephone and the network interface does not have a line adapter Go to Possible Cause 7 Your outside line is faulty Report the trouble to your local telephone company representative Possible Cause 7 Faulty network interface line adapter Replace the net work interface line adapter with another one Plug the basic telephone into each of the jacks and try to place an outside call If The trouble still appears on the basic telephone The trouble does not appear on the basic telephone Then Your outside lines are faulty Report the trouble to your local telephone company representative The old line adapter is faulty Replace it with a new line adapter Troubleshooting Procedures 7 3 SYMPTOM A VOICE TERMINAL DOESN T RING 7 4 Troubleshooting Procedures Possible Cause 1 Volume control is set too low Slide the volume control to a The voice terminal still Go to Possible Cause 2 high setting doesn t ring Possible Cause 2 Voice terminal is administered not to ring Do This If Then Refer to Th
61. gt Dial 12 to turn off Music on Hold gt Dial 13 to set the volume to low gt Dial 14 to set the volume to medium gt Dial 15 to set the volume to high 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode If you have an optional audio source connected to the Music on Hold jack and an optional loudspeaker paging system you can regulate the volume of background music with a dial code in system administration Locate the column headed Background Music on the System Configuration Form then dial the appropriate code given in the procedure below 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial one of the following codes to set the volume you prefer gt Dial 16 to turn off the background music gt Dial 17 to set the volume to low gt Dial 18 to set the volume to medium gt Dial 19 to set the volume to high 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode Basic Administration 3 13 HOLD DISCONNECT If you placed a check mark in the column marked Short under Hold INTERVAL Disconnect Interval on the System Configuration Form then your local telephone company uses the 50 millisecond disconnect interval instead of the 450 millisecond interval If your local telephone company uses a short interval you must administer this setting for
62. have the optional audio equipment connected to the Music on Hold jack check that volume selection you desire If you have an optional audio source connected to the Music on Hold jack and an optional loudspeaker paging system connected to the paging jack or a CO line jack you can provide background music throughout your building You can control the background music volume either at the audio source or at the administrator attendant console Under Background Music If you want to adjust the volume of the background music at the administrator attendant console check that volume selection you desire Your local telephone company gives you the telephone numbers for your outside lines The control unit jacks where the outside lines connect to the system are labeled alphabetically A through D for a system with four or fewer outside lines and A through H for a system with five to eight outside lines To simplify system administration plan to assign your outside lines to an unbroken sequence of jacks beginning with jack A Begin with the lines for your local published telephone numbers Group special line types such as WATS lines together in the sequence and place any personal lines at the end of the sequence Under Outside Telephone Lines Write in the telephone number and the line type for each of your outside lines next to the appropriate letter If you have an optional loudspeaker paging system that you
63. his or her voice terminal you cannot announce the call You cannot transfer a conference call Option A Simple Transfer can be used only when the person receiving the transferred call has the line button on his or her voice terminal ADMINISTRATION None PROGRAMMING If you want to program an Auto Intercom button for a voice terminal to which you often transfer calls see Auto Intercom HOW TO USE To screen a call using Option A Simple Transfer 1 Touch Hold 2 Touch Intercom and dial the intercom number of the person to whom you are transferring the call or Touch the person s Auto Intercom button 5 160 MERLIN Plus System Features 3 Announce the call and ask if it will reaccepted No a Touch the held call s line button b Advise the caller c Hang up E Susan 15 o E 555 1234 m Yes a Advise the person to touch the appropriate line button b Hang Up To transfer a call using Option B One Touch Transfer 1 With the call in progress touch the Auto Intercom button of the person to whom you want to transfer the call 2 When you hear a beep you can announce the call if appropriate 3 Hang up E g To transfer a call using Option C Direct Transfer 1 Touch Transfer 2 Dial the intercom number of the person to whom you are transferring the call 3 Hang up a MERLIN Plus System Features 5 161 Transfer Return Interval DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS A
64. leave administration mode If you entered a number other than 2 in the Ring Interval column for call forwarding follow the procedure below to change the ring interval for incoming CF calls 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 762 plus the number of rings 0 through 9 NOTE If 0 is selected the voice terminal will not ring and calls will be forwarded immediately 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode If you put a telephone number in the column headed Modify Message for Call Forwarding follow the procedure below 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 50 3 Touch the line button for the line on which you want to hear the modified message The green light goes on 3 28 Line Assignments for Voice Terminals 4 Dial the telephone number you want to include in the message NOTE For special phone numbers such as 800 numbers you may prefer to have the recorded voice pronounce the number as Eight hundred followed by the number instead of Eight zero zero To do this touch Hold to enter a pause after the toll prefix and again after the 800 area code and then again after the exchange For example 1 800 555 1212 would be entered as 1 Hold 800 Hold 555 Hold 1212 5 Repeat the procedure for each line you are admini
65. light flushing Problem with SA If the green SA light is flashing report the problem to the system administrator who should refer to Section 7 Troubleshooting to correct the problem m System O Answer MERLIN Plus System Features 5 141 System Feature Report SFR DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS NOTE This feature is used with a MERLIN Plus system data collector and an AT amp T 475 476 or 572 573 printer or equivalent If the system administrator needs to verify the features administered to the system or needs a written copy of the lines and features on each voice terminal he or she can use the data collector and the printer to print a System Feature Report This report lists both systemwide features and programmed features and lines on individual voice terminals The system features that can be printed on the System Feature Report are e Disallowed List assignments for each voice terminal e Allowed List assignments for each voice terminal e Transfer Return Interval e Call Report settings such as the minimum call duration of a call for which the Call Report feature will print information e System Speed Dial numbers e Automatic System Access ASA administration The voice terminal features that can be printed on the System Feature Report are e The intercom number of the voice terminal e The voice terminal model type e Optional accessories used with the voice terminal e Voice Announcement Enable Disable
66. lights and ringing None None To test the lights and ringing on your voice terminal 1 Slide the T P switch to 7 On some voice terminal models you must hold the switch in that position until you are finished testing your voice terminal The red and green lights next to your voice terminal buttons flash alternately and your voice terminal rings 2 Slide the T P switch to the center position If your voice terminal does not respond when you slide the Test Program switch to T check Section 7 Troubleshooting the System for possible causes and recommended action T P T P C E 5 154 MERLIN Plus System Features Toll Prefix Setting DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE In most telephone systems people must dial a toll prefix a 1 or a 0 before they dial an area code and telephone number When the MERLIN Plus system is installed it is set for dialing a toll prefix If people in your system don t need to dial a toll prefix the system administrator must set the system for dialing the area code only None If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information To administer the system so people can dial an area code and telephone number without a toll prefix 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 37 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Leave administration m
67. mode Enter administration mode Dial 30 Dial the appropriate code 1 to turn on the Call Forwarding voice message 0 to turn off the voice message Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial 50 Touch the line button s for the line s on which you want to modify the message Dial the telephone number you want to include in the message Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode continued Quick Reference Guide to System Administration 3 45 Administration Procedure Designate the number of rings before a call will be answered by ASA features Modify the voice message for one or more lines in your CF RLA SA or DXD incoming line groups Enter or change the telephone number to which you want calls forwarded Set the Call Forwarding Remote Line Access Disconnect Timer interval for systems where no forward disconnect signal is provided by the Central office Change the password for the CF or RLA feature Enter administration mode Dial 56 Dial an intercom number plus three digits NOTE To invalidate any password dial the intercom number and 000 Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial 76 Dial the number that corresponds to the ASA feature you ve selected 1 DXD 2 CF 3 RLA 4 SA Dial 0 9 for the number of rings T
68. not dropped within a few minutes the Hold Disconnect Interval needs to be administered to 50 milliseconds If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information To change the disconnect interval of your MERLIN Plus system to match the central office disconnect interval 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial the 3 character code 69 3 Touch each line button to change its disconnect interval Each touch of the button gives you one of the following codes Steady green light on line has long disconnect interval Green light off line has short disconnect interval MERLIN Plus System Features 5 81 4 Touch Administer 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position ase T P O Ban o Administer D 555 1234 D sis E Tepe D Administer 0 ELE o cages PROGRAMMING None HOW TO USE None 5 82 MERLIN Plus System Features Hold Exclusive DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE By programming the Exclusive Hold feature onto a button you can put an outside caller on Exclusive Hold which means that no one else at another voice terminal in the system can pick up the held call This feature must be programmed on a button with a green light To place a call on normal hold after it s been placed on Exclusive Hold or vice versa yo
69. number that begins with this area code and exchange you can dial the Speed Dial code or touch the button programmed for the Speed Dial code and then dial the remainder of the telephone number or use another Speed Dial code The MERLIN Plus system can hold a maximum of 130 System Speed Dial codes of up to 16 digits each IMPORTANT If you want to program a System Speed Dial code for an emergency number such as police or fire departments the FCC requires that you test that the number was programmed correctly only during off peak hours The system administrator can assign System Speed Dial codes to telephone numbers with or without Restriction Override e Ifthe administrator decides to store a System Speed Dial code with Restriction Override all voice terminals in the system can use the code as a type of password that allows the person to access the outside number regardless of Disallowed List toll or outward call restrictions previously placed on the voice terminal e The administrator may decide to store a System Speed Dial code without Restriction Override so that the Disallowed List and all toll or outward restrictions placed on voice terminals continue to apply For System Speed Dial codes assigned to telephone numbers the administrator can specify which Speed Dial codes will be printed on call reports see Call Report which codes will be displayed on display sets and which ones will be private 5 150 MERLIN Plus System
70. of incoming calls from outside the system When the display is idle the screen shows the time day and date The information appears on the screen for a maximum of 10 seconds If you disconnect a call or touch another display option button such as the Time Timer button before the 10 seconds are over the display is replaced with the time date display Dial the numbers and characters of your calls slowly so that the display unit can place them correctly on the semen 5 66 MERLIN Plus System Features ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE None None To use the four features associated with the display unit follow the instructions on the next few pages Received Call ID When you receive an intercom call the 2 digit intercom number of the person calling you appears on the screen as shown below 23 On Intercom When you transfer a call to another voice terminal and the call is unanswered the call returns to your voice terminal The 2 digit intercom number of the voice terminal from which the call is returning appears on the screen Trans Return 18 Program Mode When you begin programming the display tells you that you are in the program mode and the intercom number of your voice terminal you are programming Program Mode 16 If you touch a button that has already been programmed the display identifies the name of the feature on that button The example below shows that the Last Number Redial featur
71. options and features you ve selected Refer to the Quick Start Procedure at the beginning of this section Change the planning forms to reflect the changes you want to make then see the relevant entries in Section 5 Reference and Quick Reference Guides to make the changes See Section 4 Using the Attendant Console for information on how to use the attendant s telephone to handle incoming calls See the relevant entries and quick reference guides in Section 5 Reference and keep the MERLIN Plus System User s Guide handy Find the symptom in Section 7 Troubleshooting then follow the suggestions for solving the problem The MERLIN Plus Communications System THE CONTROL UNIT THE VOICE TERMINALS The basic MERLIN Plus system provides connections to up to four outside telephone lines and ten voice terminals We use the term voice terminal instead of telephone because a basic telephone only lets you make and receive calls while a voice terminal can be programmed to do a whole lot more which you will soon discover as you read this manual To accommodate your growing communications needs the system expands easily and economically to support up to eight outside lines and 20 voice terminals If your business eventually outgrows even the fully expanded MERLIN Plus system you can protect your investment in voice terminals accessory equipment and training time with th
72. other lines Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position ann gt oo ee ss fo TE Administer m nnn g 555 1234 o asa _ 0 50 CF no a To P o Administer FJ return to the message provided with the system Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer Dial 50 3 Touch the line button The green light goes off 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position BEG CEET Saas T P f a E m Administer 555 1234 o 5 50 o m J Top Administer ol ELE J me You may also choose to forward your calls without a message 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer Dial 30 Dial 0 to turn off the message NOTE To turn on the message dial 1 instead of 0 in step 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position EEU aun T P oO ane enun 0 T P Administer m ba Administer m om _ O 30 Oort og _ Numbers of Rings To change the number of rings the default is two rings before the CF call is answered 1 2 Slide the T P switch to P and touch Administer Dial 762 plus the
73. pattern that is easier for each person to identify There are eight different ringing patterns available Once you have programmed your Personalized Ringing selection calls that ring at your voice terminal have this ringing pattern However note that only the second part of the transferring one short and one long ring has your Personalized Ringing pattern None To choose a ringing pattern that you like 1 Slide the T P switch to P You hear the ringing sound your voice terminal makes 2 Touch Speakerphone or Speaker You hear another ringing pattern 3 Touch Speakerphone or Speaker repeatedly until you hear a ringing pattern you like 4 Slide the T P switch to the center position T P S oak T P mO jo ee oj fo ex o _ i _ After you have programmed your Personalized Ringing preference you don t need to do anything else to use the feature When a call rings at your voice terminal you will hear the ringing pattern that you have chosen 5 112 MERLIN Plus System Features Privacy DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE If you share an outside line with other people you may choose to program a Privacy button that allows you to control when others may join or monitor your telephone conversations None None The Privacy feature requires a button with lights To program a Privacy button for your voice terminal 1 Label the button Privacy
74. personal basis In order to meet company priorities and needs the system administrator can assign lines and add features that will benefit the whole system The voice terminals telephones in the MERLIN Plus system come ready to use with many preassigned features such as Transfer and Hold However people in your system can also add features to their individual voice terminals such as Privacy or Saved Number Dial that will help them handle calls easily and efficiently The information included in each feature description in MERLIN Plus System Features is divided into five headings e Description The description of the feature tells what it does and its advantages for those people using it e Considerations Special considerations include any qualifications the person using the feature should know about It also includes ways in which the feature can or cannot be used or other features it can be or cannot be used with e Administration Administration procedures tell the system administrator how to administer the features using the administrator attendant console For complete information on system administration refer to Section 3 Administering the e Programming The term Programming refers to customizing a voice terminal to suit the needs of the person who will be using it Brief programming instructions and programming codes are included for each programmable feature Directions for programming features onto available
75. programmable buttons on a voice terminal also appear in the MERLIN Plus System User s Guide e How to Use Procedures for using each feature are divided into specific steps so that a person can easily and efficiently use his or her voice terminal MERLIN Plus System Features 5 1 Abbreviated Ringing DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE When another line rings while you are busy on a call your voice terminal rings only once In this way you are aware that you have another call but it does not interrupt the call in progress After the ringing cycle stops the green light continues to flash to remind you of the other call None None None If you want to pick up the new call you can place the call in progress on hold or Exclusive Hold and touch the line button of the new call You don t need to hang up first 5 2 MERLIN Plus System Features Account Number Entry DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS You can use account numbers to identify the department project or client to whom the call should be charged If your system uses the Call Report feature often referred to as Station Message Detail Recording SMDR you can include these account numbers in the Call Reports oe OTE There are two methods you can use to enter account numbers on a printed Call Report a quick method and a general method Most businesses will be satisfied with the quick method of entering account num
76. switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 57 The green light goes on next to those lines that cannot be bridged or monitored 3 Ifyou want to change the Privacy setting of either Line A or Line E touch the line button until the green light next to it shows the setting you want Green light on the line is private Green light off the line can be monitored 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position tulle ses 15 Administer ol san 555 1234 5 E Ah o None None 5 114 MERLIN Plus System Features Program DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE By using the Test Program switch and following the instructions listed below you can program features that you have selected for your voice terminal onto available buttons There are several programmable features that you can use with either a button or a dial code Therefore if you have a limited number of available feature buttons on your BIS 10 or BIS 22 voice terminal you may choose to use a dial code rather than program any of those features onto your voice terminal If you make a mistake when programming a button simply touch the button again and redial the programming code and all required numbers The system administrator can use the Program Mode Lock feature to prevent people within the system from changing programming
77. telephone numbers that are private only the dial code is printed on the call report 99198 Reset the system for service personnel only Quick Reference Guide to Administration Codes 3 51 Section 4 Using The Attendant Console Overview THE ATTENDANT CONSOLE As your company s system attendant you will probably answer most calls that come into the business and transfer many of those calls to other people in the office This section includes descriptions instructions and suggestions that will help you transfer calls and use Auto Intercom buttons and Group Page features the Send Message feature and the headset For more information about any of the MERLIN Plus Communications System features discussed here refer to Section 5 Reference The main attendant console plugged into jack 10 on the control unit also serves as the administration console All of the company s lines appear on separate buttons on this console It is important especially if you answer most of the incoming calls that as the attendant you have an Auto Intercom button with lights for each voice terminal in the system Therefore most attendants use a BIS 34 or BIS 34D model voice terminal that has enough buttons for lines and Auto Intercom buttons When you plug in your BIS 34 or BIS 34D model voice terminal into intercom jack 10 on the control unit your console automatically y has a button for every line and an Auto Intercom button for e
78. the middle of a programmed dialing sequence To do so you must enter one or more special characters when you program the sequence The switchhook flash can be used only at the beginning of a programmed dialing sequence Your MERLIN Plus system may work behind a PBX or a Centrex system or you may use Custom Calling features If so use the PBX Centrex or Custom Calling features exactly as their instructions describe However there are two important exceptions e Any PBX Centrex or Custom Calling feature code that begins with a must be preceded by another in order to operate in the MERLIN Plus system For example if PBX Centrex or Custom Calling instructions tell you to dial 1234 you must actually dial 1234 For your convenience you may want to program a button if you need to follow this procedure frequently e When PBX Centrex or Custom Calling instructions tell you to include a switchhook flash you must touch Recall instead If you touch the switchhook you ll disconnect the call None Use the following procedures to enter special characters into a dialing sequence Pause Program a pause 1 5 seconds into a dialing sequence For example you may need a pause between an access code such as a 9 and an outside telephone number in an Outside Auto Dial sequence 1 Dial the access code such as a 9 2 Touch Hold Pause 3 Dial the outside telephone number Pause See 5 S n Z ENN
79. this section for ASA jack assignments If your responsibilities do not include administration skip this information SA Line Groups To add lines that can be answered by SA 1 Enter administration mode by sliding T P to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 75 3 Touch the incoming line button that you are adding to or removing from the feature Green light on line can be answered by SA Green light off line cannot be answered by SA 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position Administer ol O a 555 1234 Administer E E mS i o Number of Rings To change the number of rings the default is two rings before SA answers a call 1 Slide the T P switch to P and touch Administer 2 Dial 764 plus the number of rings between 0 and 9 before the SA feature picks up the call NOTE If the number of rings is set to 0 the voice terminal will not ring and the calls will be immediately answered by SA 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position aan T op o aan g T P o Administer 5 cae J Administer m OE 27688 lt MERLIN Plus System Features 5 139 PROGRAMMING Voice Message To select a message to be played to the caller for lines answered by SA 1 Enter administration mode by sliding T P to P and
80. this code 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position TepP Po Ez I Administer IE 5 71 orm 172 o T P o Administer o n Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer Dial 71 for group 1 or 72 for group 2 Touch Drop Susan 15 oj i MERLIN Plus System Features 5 75 PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE 5 76 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position 1 2 a T P B O Administer ol a Drop ol De Oo 71 or 72 o T P Administer oj E D a To program a Group Page button for your voice terminal Label the button Group Page plus a group number Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls Touch the button you want to program Dial 91 plus a Group Page code 70 Page All all voice terminals in the system 71 group 1 72 group 2 Slide the T P switch to the center position Baa gee T P o aus RES T P Grp Page o aan aus mz 1 ELI o Group 2 BEE unn _ g 70 72 lt You can use a programmed button or a dial code to access this feature To use a Group Page button
81. to six rings or more If 0 is selected calls will not be transferred back to the originator 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode Basic Administration 3 11 CALL REPORT 3 12 Basic Administration If you have the optional data collector and printer necessary to generate Call Reports you can keep records of incoming and outgoing calls You will first need to set the date using the following procedure 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict Dial 80 Dial two digits for the month 01 through 12 Dial two digits for the day 01 through 31 Dial two digits for the year 00 through 99 O a Ff WO ND Touch Administer The console beeps twice 7 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode Now set the time 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 81 3 Dial two digits for the hour 00 through 23 using 24 hour time 4 Dial two digits for the minute 00 through 59 5 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 6 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode Since the system is factory set to have no calls reported you must now select the type of calls you want reported Locate the column headed Call Report on the System Configuration Form and follow the procedures below 1 Enter administration mod
82. to the button on all the voice terminals that have the programmed CF DXD button A synthesized voice message This message is automatically supplied by the VSP in the control unit The administrator can modify the message when necessary or may choose to turn off the message That one jack on the control unit be dedicated to the ASA features See Automatic System Access in this section for administration procedures That you administer at least one line to an incoming and one line to an outgoing line group At startup none of the system s lines are assigned to the CF incoming or outgoing line group If there is only one line in the incoming line group and one line in the outgoing line group they cannot be the same line The green light next to the CF button will flash when you try to turn it on When the system is in CF mode the feature s operation affects only those calls that come in on lines in the CF incoming line group Likewise the system only uses the lines in the CF outgoing line group to forward calls Calls coming in on lines not assigned to the CF incoming line group are not automatically answered for call forwarding Call Forwarding should be used only at night if your system has one or more MERLIN Attendants and you do not have dedicated lines for Call Forwarding To use Call Forwarding at night with the MERLIN Attendant activate this feature before leaving the office at the end of the business day and
83. touching Administer 2 Dial 77 followed by the option desired Message 2 is the default 0 No voice message call is immediately placed on hold 1 Message says Please hold 2 Message says Please hold your call will be handled momentarily NOTE Ifa line number is administered using 50 this message precedes message and 2 You have reached where is a number entered by the system administrator in Call Forwarding 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position anu T P ena o T P mj Administer m san o Administer m B p peg _ To program a System Answer button on a voice terminal NOTE Only the attendant or the alternate attendant can have a System Answer button The voice terminal does not have to be at Intercom 10 1 Label the button System Answer 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannel place or receive calls 3 Touch System Answer 4 Dial the time digit code 58 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position gaan Te P o A anu T P B ystem aan ss g Answer m Ben _ 58 e 5 140 MERLIN Plus System Features HOW TO USE To activate the System Answer feature 1 Touch System Answer Green light on SA on Green light off SA off Green
84. use a dial code to retrieve a held call 1 Dial 5 86 MERLIN Plus System Features Intercom DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE Each voice terminal connected to the MERLIN Plus system has a unique 2 digit intercom number You can dial intercom numbers to place calls to people connected to the system In the MERLIN Plus system you place an intercom call with a voice announcement Your co worker hears your voice through the voice terminal speaker and can either touch Speakerphone or lift the handset to respond to you However if the person you are calling has activated the Voice Announcement Disable feature your intercom call rings rather than beeps at the person s voice terminal and you cannot give your voice announcement See Voice Announcement Enable Disable If you program an Auto Intercom button for the intercom number you want to call you can dial the number with one touch See Auto Intercom You cannot announce an intercom call to a person active on the voice terminal s speaker None None To place an intercom call with a voice announcement 1 Touch Intercom 2 Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset 3 Dial the 2 digit intercom number for the voice terminal you want to call 4 When you hear a beep begin speaking or If you hear ringing wait for the person to answer oO Seah EEE peaker Ban g Intercom E O phone m nnu Icom no
85. voice terminal Write a 2 if you want to assign the Dialer Template to a voice terminal Write a 3 if you want to assign the Feature Template to a voice terminal Write a 4 if you want to assign the Secretary Receptionist Template to a voice terminal The Program Mode Lock feature allows you to lock specified voice terminals so that individuals cannot change the features assigned to their voice terminals Under Lock on the Voice Terminals form Put a check mark next to each voice terminal you want to assign Program Mode Lock You should now have a completed System Configuration Form Line Assignments Form NAME AND INTERCOM NUMBER LINE ASSIGNMENTS FOR VOICE TERMINALS You can use the information already entered on your System Configuration Form to complete this part of the Line Assignments Form In the Name column on the form Write the names of the people in your business next to their intercom numbers When your system is first installed all your outside telephone lines appear on the same buttons on every voice terminal in the system These are the voice terminals original line scammed ieee ows the original line assignments for 5 10 22 and 34 button voice terminals A voice terminal retains its original line assignments until someone administer it differently Line Assignments Form 2 9 FIGURE 2 1 Original Line Assignments __ _ 3 4 Button UG
86. you hear dialing When you use the Group Listening feature your speaker may make a squealing noise when the handset comes close to it To prevent this touch Speaker when you have completed a call and are ready to hang up your handset Another way to reduce the squealing sound is to turn down the volume control on your voice terminal This feature is not available on the BIS 10 BIS 22 BIS 22D BIS 34 or BIS 34D None None To use On Hook Dialing 1 Without lifting your handset touch Speaker 2 Dial the number 3 When you hear the other person answer lift your handset to speak ESE agen aan Speaker aga tel no bs 5 134 MERLIN Plus System Features If the line is busy or if you get no answer 1 Touch Speaker to cancel the call To use Monitor on Hold 1 When you have been put on hold touch Speaker 2 Hang up 3 When you hear the other person return to the call lift your handset and continue the call 1 SS To use Group Listening 1 Without hanging up touch Speaker and continue your conversation MERLIN Plus System Features 5 135 Special Characters in Dialing Sequences DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING You may need to program a pause stop or switchhook flash into an Outside Auto Dial a Personal Speed Dial a Disallowed List or a System Speed Dial sequence or YOU may need to switch from rotary to Touchstone signals in
87. you must wait until it is idle before you can use Copy If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information To copy line and feature assignments from one voice terminal to another 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the voice terminal to which you want to copy line assignments 3 Touch Copy 5 54 MERLIN Plus System Features 4 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the voice terminal from which you are copying line assignments 5 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 6 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position 7 Be sure to label the new line assignments on the voice terminal to which you did the copying z Administer 0 E John 12 m oO T P o Susan 15 m Administer m E E PROGRAMMING None HOW TO USE None MERLIN Plus System Features 5 55 Customized Line Assignment DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION The system administrator can assign lines to any voice terminal in any order or choose not to assign particular lines to a voice terminal The administrator can use Customized Line Assignment if he or she wants to assign lines or groups of lines to selected voice terminals with similar requirements for placing and receiving calls For example this might include
88. 1 7 12 v voice announcement 5 15 Cd Disable and transferred calls 4 4 4 5 15 15 15 160 5 168 5 171 ag on HFAI voice terminal 5 163 with basic telephoneJ6 5 Cid with Group Page with hands free units Enable 5 171 Enable Disable with Direct Extension Dialing voice terminal jack assignments administering lights speaker trouble with Lae r 5 163 5 87 5 163 setting for Music on Hold Index l 7
89. 2 983 984 985 986 987 988 989 Private Number Check one Telephone Account Name Restriction Override continued MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms 2 37 Dial Check one Code Private Number Telephone Account oop ena _Ser _ re won o S S a as ee E rr ee e eos ooo o d S R5 E E e N 996 ooo o d S E ee ee a ee a ee Ee a es ees 2 38 MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms Name Restriction Override Section 3 Administering the System Introduction INITIAL ADMINISTRATION ONGOING ADMINISTRATION You can begin using your MERLIN Plus Communications System right now Just make sure the system is set to generate the right dial signals for your outside telephone lines and to recognize the long distance dialing procedure for your area To make these simple checks see Dial Signals and Long Distance Dialing under Basic Administration later in this section To take full advantage of your system s advanced features you should plan to customize it to fit the needs of your business However you do not need to customize it all at once Look through this section for options and features that best suit the way your business operates and make the most important settings first You can always change these or add others later Before you begin to customize your system you should understand the meaning of the terms administer and program as the
90. 4 and then 6 or 46 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position J J T P l Administer ol FETA Administer m OE g 41 6 48 o _ 5 56 MERLIN Plus System Features PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE Assigning Lines to Voice Terminals Before you assign lines to voice terminals in your system refer to the Line Assignments Form that you have filled out To assign lines to a voice terminal 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the voice terminal that you are administering A green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button Green lights also go on next to the buttons of any lines already assigned to the voice terminal Touch all of the line buttons that have a light next to them The green light next to each line button goes off Touch all the line buttons again this time in the order that you want them to appear on the voice terminal If you want to reserve a button s for feature programming touch that button s last Green lights go on next to the line buttons you touch Touch Administer The console beeps twice If you reserved a button s for feature programming gt Touch the button s that you want to be used for feature programming again Green light goes off next to the button you touch Leave admin
91. 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 74 you do not need to dial an outside number 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position aan Te P J Saved aan T P ave San EI J Number m Ean gt _ 74 _ 5 130 MERLIN Plus System Features HOW TO USE You can use a programmed button or a dial code to access this feature To save a number for redialing 1 Before you touch Speakerphone or hang up your handset from a call in progress touch Saved Number or dial 23 if you haven t already programmed this personal speed dial code 2 Touch Speakerphone or hang up your handset o Saved O Number Speaker m phone m The MERLIN Plus system saves this number until you repeat this procedure to save another number To redial this number later 1 Without touching Speakerphone or lifting your handset repeat the first step you used to save the number So if you touched Saved Number touch it again or if you dialed 23 dial it again Your voice terminal speaker goes on and you hear dialing 2 When you hear the other person answer touch Speakerphone or lift your handset and begin talking phone o Speaker m CJ Saved o D Number If the line is busy or if no one answers 1 Touch Speakerphone or hang up to cancel the call Speaker 0 phone m
92. 6 exchange in any state the disallowed number would be entered as 1 Hold Hold Hold 976 or 0 Hold Hold Hold 976 You cannot dial a number on an Allowed List if it matches a number on the Disallowed List For example if 976 3535 is on the Allowed List but the 976 exchange is on the Disallowed List the number will not go through If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information As you administer a Disallowed List to your system refer to the Disallowed List Form you completed in Section 2 To setup a Disallowed List 1 Slide the T P switch to P and touch Administer 2 Dial 09 followed by the Disallowed List code 01 to 20 3 Dial the disallowed number up to 16 digits If the number includes wild card digits touch Hold once for each wild card digit 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position SEs Baa T P o Bsa Ben 0 Te P Administer T meate A Administer m B E a o 0901 40920 disallowed o lt no MERLIN Plus System Features 5 63 5 64 To assign Disallowed List to voice terminals 1 2 3 4 5 MERLIN Plus System Features Slide the T P switch to P and touch Administer Dial 0900 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the appropriate code from the table below for the voice terminal you want to assign the Disallowed List If you want to prevent a
93. 6 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position aan BES o Bae aan J Te P Administer m 4 m Administer o O B B 56 Icom no 123 Number of Rings To change the number of rings the default is two rings before the RLA call is answered 1 Slide the T P switch to P and touch Administer 2 Dial 763 plus the number of rings between 0 and 9 before the RLA feature picks up the call NOTE Ifthe number of rings is set to 0 the voice terminal will not ring and the calls will be immediately answered 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position EBB T P oO gaa o T e P ELI o Administer o 4 o Administer ol EE E MERLIN Plus System Features 5 123 PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE A button with a green light next to it is recommended for the RLA feature To program an RLA button on a voice terminal 1 Label the button RLA 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you re programming and can t receive or place calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 84 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position Using the RLA Button Touching the RLA button toggles the system back and forth between the normal mode and the RLA mode You can tell which mode you are in by the status of the green light next to the RL
94. A button Green light on RLA mode Green light off Normal mode Green light flashing Problem with RLA If the green light next to the RLA button is flashing notify the system administrator who should refer to Section 7 Troubleshooting to correct the problem Gaining Access to a Line using RLA If the system is in RLA mode you can gain access to an outside line from a remote location by following this procedure NOTE If you will be using this feature ask your system administrator for the handy MERLIN Plus CF RLA Card that provides instructions for RLA 1 Dial the telephone number of a line in the RLA incoming line group 2 When the call is answered the VSP begins prompting you through the procedure in which the following information is called for NOTE The system verifies each response such as the correct password or unrestricted lines or telephone numbers If the response is incorrect or not allowed the system requests the caller to respond again e Enter the 5 digit password the first two digits are a valid intercom number e Enter the line number of the outside line you want to make your call on e Enter the telephone number you want to reach plus a 5 124 MERLIN Plus System Features 3 When you have finished responding to the voice prompts you will hear normal call progress tones ringing busy signal fast busy signal etc 4 Complete your call as usual If the system is in either CF or DX
95. A programmed button with green and red lights labeled CF DXD You use the CF DXD button to activate either Call Forwarding or Direct Extension Dialing To put the system in either of these modes or in normal mode you touch the CF DXD button The green and red lights show you what mode you re in gt If the system is in normal mode touch the button once to put the system in DXD mode Green and red lights off Normal mode Only green light on DXD mode Green light flashing Problem with DXD call your system administrator Only red light on CF mode gt Touch the button three times to put the system back into normal mode both the green and red lights are off e A synthesized voice message This message is automatically supplied by the VSP in the control unit The administrator can modify the message to add the telephone number that the callers have contacted 5 58 MERLIN Plus System Features e That one jack on the control unit be dedicated to the ASA features At startup jack number 18 is automatically designated as the ASA jack An Auto Access cord that you plug into this jack is connected to the memory module which houses the VSP If you want to change this jack assignment follow the simple administration procedure discussed under Automatic System Access earlier in this section e Its own incoming line group The feature s operation includes only calls coming in on lines assigned to the DXD incoming line grou
96. Administer o aan o Intercom m me 89 J T P 5 Administer D Om _ If you want to lock the programming function on all the voice terminals in your system except the administrator attendant console connected to jack 10 1 5 118 MERLIN Plus System Features Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer Dial 89 Perform one of the following procedures according to whether you want to lock or unlock the programming function at all the voice terminals in your system gt Touch Conference to lock every voice terminal in your system A green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button corresponding to the appropriate voice terminals The voice terminals are locked they cannot enter programming mode gt Touch Drop to unlock all voice terminals in your system A green light goes off next to the Auto Intercom button corresponding to the appropriate voice terminals The voice terminals are unlocked they can enter programming mode when necessary 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position ans ToP Fa ase gt Administer D mee 89 o T eP Administer m EE m lt _ PROGRAMMING None HOW TO USE Check with your system administrator to see if you can program features at your voice terminal or if programming can be done only at the administrator attendant conso
97. Configuration Form DIAL SIGNALS LONG DISTANCE DIALING 2 2 System Configuration Form Use the System Configuration Form to record information about the following e Dial Signals e Long Distance Dialing e Transfer Return Interval e Call Report e Music on Hold e Background Music e Outside Telephone Lines e Voice Terminals The following information should help you make the appropriate entries for your system on the System Configuration Form The MERLIN Plus system comes set to generate Touch Tones when you dial an outside call This means that if one or more of your outside telephone lines transmits rotary pulse signals you have to administer the system for rotary dialing Otherwise you won t be able to dial out over the rotary lines NOTE If some of your outside lines are Touch Tone and some rotary you may want to ask your local telephone company to replace the rotary lines with Touch Tone lines Under Dial Signals on the form Check the box next to Touch Tone if all the outside telephone lines connected to your system are Touch Tone lines Check the box next to Rotary Pulse if one or more of the outside lines connected to your system are rotary lines Under Long Distance Dialing Check the box next to Toll Prefix if you have to dial atoll prefix 1 or 0 before the area code when you dial the telephone number for a long distance call Check the box next to Area Code
98. D mode you can gain access to a line in the RLA outgoing line group from a remote location by following this procedure 1 Depending on the mode the system is in dial the telephone number for a line in either the CF or the DXD incoming line group When the call is answered the VSP gives the appropriate message 2 During the voice message dial The VSP begins prompting you through the RLA procedure 3 Respond appropriately to the voice prompts until you hear normal call progress tones ringing busy signal fast busy signal etc 4 Complete your call as usual MERLIN Plus System Features 5 125 Ring Override DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE Sometimes you may want all of your calls to ring immediately even if you have programmed the lines on your voice terminal to ring after a delay or not at all See Ringing Options For instance you may need to cover calls for someone who shares one of your lines You can use a Ring Override button to temporarily override the ringing option you have established None None A button with lights is recommended but not required To program a Ring Override button for your voice terminal 1 Label the button Ring Override 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 78 5 Slide
99. DMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE When someone in the MERLIN Plus system transfers a call and it is not answered the call returns to the sender When the system is first installed it is set to return calls after four rings The system administrator can change that setting so that calls ring as many as nine times before they return to the person who has transferred it The administrator may also choose to set the system not to return transferred calls at all If you are using the Direct Extension Dialing DXD feature with your MERLIN Plus system you may want to consider setting a Transfer Return Interval For more information see Direct Extension Dialing in this section If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information To administer the Transfer Return Interval for your system 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 2 plus the number of rings up to nine you want before a call returns For example 20 programs the system not to return transferred calls 21 programs the system to transfer calls after one ring 29 programs the system to transfer calls after nine rings NOTE If anyone in your MERLIN Plus system will be using an answering machine for back up coverage of calls to their telephones set the Transfer Return Interval to six or more rings 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Leave administra
100. E Hold mj 5 136 MERLIN Plus System Features HOW TO USE Stop Program a stop into a dialing sequence to wait for a second dial tone For example you may need to program a stop between a local telephone number and an alternate long distance authorization code 1 Dial the local telephone number seven digits 2 Touch Drop Stop 3 Dial the authorization code five or six digits Switchhook Flash Program a switchhook flash at the beginning of a dialing sequence For example you may need to program a button with a PBX Centrex or Custom Calling feature code that calls for a switchhook flash 1 Touch Recall 2 Touch Hold Pause 3 Dial the PBX or Centrex dial code sequence that gives you access to the feature you want to program Recall D Hold 0 Pause Touch Tone Enable Program Touch Tone Enable into a dialing sequence on a line with rotary signal For example you may need to use a credit card authorization service 8 Baan a o 1 Touch Transfer 2 Dial the credit card authorization code Transfer m If your MERLIN Plus system works behind a PBX or a Centrex system or you are using the Custom Calling features follow these directions 1 When PBX Centrex or Custom Calling feature instructions tell you to dial a dial a second For example if the instructions tell you to dial 4567 you must actually dial 4567 in
101. F destination number from outside the system while the system is in CF DXD or RLA mode follow this procedure NOTE This procedure is available on the MERLIN Plus CF RLA card so that you can refer to it when you re changing the CF destination while off site 1 Dial the telephone number for one of the lines in the CF incoming line group When the call is answered you hear the CF voice message 2 During the voice message dial The system goes into RLA mode and the VSP asks you to enter your password NOTE If a voice prompt is not administered the CF destination number cannot be changed from outside the system 3 At the voice prompt enter your password The VSP arks you to enter a line number 4 At the voice prompt dial 00 The VSP asks you to enter the new call forward number followed by a pound MERLIN Plus System Features 5 37 5 Dial the new CF telephone number plus a pound The VSP repeats the new number and asks you to either confirm it by dialing a or deny it by dialing 00 6 Dial to confirm or dial 00 to return to step 5 above and try again After receiving the confirmation signal the VSP repeats the new number once more and identifies it as the new call forward number 7 Hang up see Sun naw oes soe Ds RE E E E QS 0 ar password 00 tel no NS PROGRAMMING A button with a red light next to it is required for the CF feature To program a CF DXD
102. For rotary lines a series of rotary pulses Ringing tone A ringing sound The call is ringing at the other person s phone Testing A steady ringing sound Your MERLIN Plus system has feedback been installed correctly Feedback Sound Meaning of the Feedback Programming Your voice terminal rings every You are in programming mode and reminder 5 seconds to remind you that you cannot place or receive calls can t place or receive calls Error Deny tone One beep You have made an error in administration and should try the step again Confirmation Two beeps The administration feature has tone been entered into the system Hold Reminder One beep every minute You have a call on hold 5 156 MERLIN Plus System Features CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE The MERLIN Plus system also provides you with the following ringing sounds or voice announcements so that you know immediately what kind of call you are receiving If you hear this type of ring or announcement One short and one long ring A beep followed by a voice announcement through your voice terminal speaker A beep followed by a voice announcement through your voice terminal before you receive a transferred call A beep One long beep One long ring You are receiving this kind of call Transferred Call Intercom Call with Voice Announcement Transferred Call with Voice Announcement Manual Signaling Ringing Inte
103. For those voice terminals with a check mark in the Disallowed List column on the form follow the procedure below 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 0900 3 Follow the appropriate procedure below NOTE To assign the Disallowed List to all voice terminals touch Conference gt Touch the Auto Intercom button for the voice terminal you want to assign the Disallowed List The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button gt Dial the appropriate code from the Dial Code chart located earlier in this section under the heading The BIS 22 Voice Terminal Used as an Administrator Console for the voice terminal to which the Disallowed List is to be assigned 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode For those voice terminals with a check mark in the Unrestricted column on the form you don t have to do anything here because when your system is first installed all voice terminals are unrestricted Check marks in the Toll Restricted and Outward Restricted columns show the type of restriction you want to place on the voice terminal To assign either outward call restrictions or toll call restrictions to voice terminals follow the procedure below 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Follow the appropriate procedure
104. Group Page group or add the voice terminal to an Allowed List use the dial code 04 that corresponds with intercom number 21 NOTE Itis important that you record your decisions about Allowed and Disallowed Lists on the Call Restrictions Assignment Form record decisions about your Call Report and or System Feature Report jack assignment and Group Page on the System Configuration Form Keep these forms handy in case you decide to make changes The BIS 10 voice terminal is not recommended to be used as the administrator attendant console because the administrator cannot see the buttons being administered Furthemore some features cannot be programmed from this voice terminal However if you are using a BIS 10 voice terminal as an administrator attendant console to perform the administration procedures for many of the special features follow the instructions provided for the BIS 22 voice terminal which generally require that you enter the dial codes see chart below directly without touching an Auto Intercom button If the intercom If the intercom number is Dial this code number is Dial this code Intercom 10 22 Intercom 20 03 Intercom 11 21 intercom 21 04 Intercom 12 20 Intercom 22 05 Intercom 13 19 Intercom 23 06 Intercom 14 18 Intercom 24 07 Intercom 15 17 Intercom 25 08 Intercom 16 16 Intercom 26 09 Intercom 17 15 Intercom 27 10 Intercom 18 14 Intercom 28 11 Intercom 19 13 Intercom 29 12 The in
105. ION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE If you share a line with another person you can join or bridge onto a call in progress on that line In this way you can easily join a conference call by just touching a line button and Speakerphone or lifting your handset See Up to three people connected to the MERLIN Plus system including the originator of the call can bridge onto a call atone time When a person bridges onto a call in progress the red and green lights next to the line button on your voice terminal flash alternately so that you know that someone else has joined the call You cannot use the Bridging feature on a voice terminal with Button Free Line Operation If a person has activated the Privacy feature on his or her voice terminal you cannot bridge onto a call in progress at that voice terminal See Privacy None None To bridge onto a call in progress 1 Touch the line button associated with the call 2 Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset m Speaker f 555 1234 m D Shone m 5 24 MERLIN Plus System Features Busy Buster BB DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS The Busy Buster feature automatically redials the number you most recently dialed up to ten times at 60 second intervals If the called telephone begins to ring within this time your voice terminal alerts you To use this feature the system administrator must have assigned the feature to a voi
106. ION None PROGRAMMING To program an Automatic Line Selection sequence for your voice terminal 1 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 2 Dial 3 Touch the line buttons in the order you prefer 4 Ifyou want to continue programming other features dial again Otherwise slide the T P switch to the center position E a Tepe o 555 1234 m ELE z Susu Bena Base 5 18 MERLIN Plus System Features HOW TO USE When you want to place an outside call 1 Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset The MERLIN Plus system connects you to the first available line in the Automatic Line Selection sequence J Speaker m phone MERLIN Plus System Features 5 19 Automatic System Access ASA DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS Automatic System Access ASA includes four features that allow more flexible use of your MERLIN plus system and your outside lines The features are described in this section under separate entries e Call Forwarding CF When the system is in CF mode incoming calls on designated lines are connected to a Voice Synthesis Processor VSP in the control unit for a message Meanwhile the control unit calls the telephone number to which calls are being forwarded and uses the system s Conference feature to connect the incoming call to the outgoing call e Direct Extension
107. ISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE 6 12 Accessory Equipment You must have a licensed locksmith install any locks or electric strikeplates used for doorphone operation Although the Doorphone Controller can be configured to connect to either a Central Office CO port or a station port it is recommended that only the CO port connection be used The CO port to which the Door Phone Controller is connected can be dedicated to the Door Phone Controller or shared by a CO line and the Door Phone Controller The CO port to which the Doorphone Controller is connected must be administered to appear on all telephones that are to answer the door If the Doorphone Controller shares the port with a CO line that line must appear on all telephones that are to access the CO line as well as on any telephones that are to answer the door See Customized Line Assignment Refer to the MERLIN Doorphone Owner s Manual for programming information Dedicated Line e When the doorbell rings pickup your telephone You will be able to talk to whomever is calling from the door You can also open the door by dialing the door open code or activating a switch You disconnect by hanging up the phone Shared Line Port e When the Doorphone Controller shares a port with a CO line the Doorphone Controller may be set so that when you pickup the telephone you are connected to either the doorphone or an outside line first If the phone is set t
108. Intercom Number 10 By design the intercom 10 position is the primary call handling position in the system and it is also the system administration point If your system will have an attendant you should assign intercom number 10 to the voice terminal at the system attendant s location For complete system administration the voice terminal assigned intercom 10 should be either a BIS 22 or a BIS 34 model If you have 10 or fewer voice terminals you may prefer to use a BIS 22 voice terminal Under Voice Terminals Write in the name of the system attendant administrator and that person s location on the line next to number 10 Intercom Number 18 Notice on the form that ASA appears in the Name column next to intercom number 18 ASA stands for Automatic System Access a group of features that includes Call Forwarding Direct Extension Dialing System Answer and Remote Line Access These features allow you to take advantage of the economy and efficiency of your MERLIN Plus system and its long distance service lines when you re away from the office on business or even when you re at home System Configuration Form 2 5 2 6 System Configuration Form Activation of the ASA features requires a dedicated voice terminal jack on the control unit At startup the system automatically reserves jack intercom number 18 for the ASA features But you can choose another voice terminal jack for ASA during syst
109. ME MEDIUM 13 TURN 2 1S 4 rings CE DIALING TOLL PREFIX TOUCH TONE 38 li 38 MI NI MUM CALL DURATION 10 SECONDS NO CALL REPORT 0 83 1 MINUTES LS REPORTED 84 CESS ASA FEATURES OPTION 30 ON 753 MESSAGE Is NUMBER 1S 12125551000 ACCESS 12000 22000 PASSWORDS ARE 13000 14000 23000 24000 08 in list printed 56 15000 25000 16000 26000 17000 27000 01 for each list following the station list UMBER 15 20 25 XXXXX XXXX XXX 212976 If you are using the same printer and data collector for both features and change the voice terminal jack assignment you must administer the new jack ass ignment for both features You cannot use the same jack that you used for ASA but you can use the same jack that you used for BB by using the 450F adapter and cord supplied with the data collector If necessary you can change the jack assignments for BB and ASA The report for each voice terminal shows all voice terminals as having 34 buttons This allows flexibility for upgrading and changing voice terminals MERLIN Plus System Features 5 143 ADMINISTRATION 5 144 If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information To set the date and the time to assign a voice terminal jack for the System Feature Report and to print or to cancel a report use the following procedures The Date and
110. NS ADMINISTRATION If you want to pick up an intercom or outside call that is ringing at another voice terminal use the Call Pickup feature You can use this feature in three different ways e Option A You can use a dial code and dial the intercom number of the ringing voice terminal e Option B You can program a Call Pickup button and dial the intercom number of the ringing voice terminal e Option C You can program a One Touch Call Pickup button for a specific voice terminal in your business so that when the person is away you can answer that person s calls with one touch You can program a Call Pickup button for each voice terminal for which you need to answer calls If the line on which the call is coming in appears on a button on your voice terminal you do not need to use the Call Pickup feature to answer the call You can just touch the line button on which the call is ringing and then touch Speakerphone or lift your handset If you want someone in the office such as a guard to answer calls that come in after hours program a Call Pickup button for calls that come in at the administrator attendant console Since the attendant console has all the lines of your MERLIN Plus system the person answering calls after hours can pickup all calls by touching the Call Pickup button whenever the attendant console rings If the person is in another part of the building the attendant can connect his or her console and an extra
111. NS People connected to the MERLIN Plus system can bridge onto an outside line that is active on the conference call unless one of the participants has activated the Privacy feature However when the maximum configuration of three people within the system and two from outside is reached attempts to add more people will be denied Use the Drop button followed by touching the appropriate line button when you want to selectively disconnect one outside line at a time from a conference call See Drop If you press the switchhook you may end the conference call You cannot use the Conference feature for outside lines on a voice terminal with Button Free Line Operation If you attempt to add to a conference call a voice terminal that is busy on an another call you will hear busy tones and the call is automatically dropped in 15 seconds If the voice terminal dots not answer you can drop the call by touching Drop without disconnecting the person who is already apart of the conference ADMINISTRATION None PROGRAMMING None HOW TO USE To setup a conference call when one outside line is already on the call 1 Touch Conference 2 Touch a free line button 3 Dial the outside number of the person you want to add to the conference call ann o ann tel no If you don t want the person already connected to listen while you connect the second person to the call 1 Touch Hold 2 Touch a free line button 3 Dial the outside num
112. NTERVAL Locate the column headed Long Distance Dialing on the System Configuration Form Is the box next to Toll Prefix checked If so you don t have to do anything here Your system is factory set for this type of long distance dialing toll prefix 1 or 0 area code telephone number But if the box next to Area Code Only has a check you have to set the system for this type of long distance dialing area code telephone number as follows 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 37 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode Reversing the Procedure If you ever have to reset your system to toll prefix dialing follow the above procedure but dial 36 instead of 37 in step 2 Locate the column headed Transfer Return Interval on the System Configuration Form If the box next to ____ Rings is checked and the number 4 is filled in the system is factory set to return unanswered transferred calls after four rings You don t have to do anything But if the No Rings box is checked or the ____ Rings box is filled in with a number other than 4 then you have to change the system as follows 1 Enter administration mode 2 Dial 2 plus the number of rings 0 through 9 you want before a call returns NOTE For use with answering machines set the transfer return interval
113. OTE If you are using the same printer and data collector for producing Call Reports and System Feature Reports you must administer the new jack assignment for both features 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 82 The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button of the jack assigned to Call Report 3 Perform one of the following procedures gt Touch the Auto Intercom button of the jack you want to assign to Call Report The green light goes off next to the old Auto Intercom button and the green light goes on next to the newly assigned Auto Intercom button gt Dial the intercom number of jack you re assigning to Call Report 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode Basic Administration 3 15 3 16 Basic Administration Changing the Reports jack assignment for System Feature Report NOTE If you are using the same printer and data collector for producing Call Reports and System Feature Reports you must administer the new jack assignment for both features 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 85 The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button of the jack assigned to System Feature Report 3 Perform one of the following procedure gt Touch the Auto Intercom button of the jack you want to assign to System Feature
114. P g ana Administer m 44 i 63 PROGRAMMING None HOW TO USE None MERLIN Plus System Features 5 147 System Reset WARNING This feature is intended for service personnel only DESCRIPTION When the service person or the administrator uses System Reset the entire MERLIN Plus system is set to the initial feature assignments and consequently erases any system administration such as System Speed Dial numbers or call restrictions It is useful when making radical changes to the system or starting administration over again CONSIDERATIONS When the the service person on the administrator resets the system all programming done for any voice terminal in the MERLIN Plus system is erased If the administrator has administered customized line assignments for any voice terminal these are erased also and the line configuration is returned to square operation All administered features are erased ADMINISTRATION System Reset requires readministering your system and reprogramming all voice terminals To reset your system to the initial feature assignments 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 99198 The console beeps twice NOTE If the console beeps only once or not at all the reset didn t work probably because someone was using the system when you dialed the System Reset code Wait until no one is using the system and try the reset again 3 Go to the control unit a
115. Paging System connected to the MERLIN Plus system you can page people make announcements and provide background music if available throughout the building You have two options 1 You can connect the loudspeaker paging system to the Page Jack on the front of the control unit 2 You can connect the loudspeaker paging system to a CO outside line jack on a line module and administer that jack as a paging port Refer to Loudspeaker Paging System under Accessories at the end of this section Refer to Loudspeaker Paging System under Accessories at the end of this section If your loudspeaker paging system is connected to the page jack on the control unit you can program a loudspeaker paging button to use instead of a dial code whenever you want to page someone A button with lights is recommended for the Loudspeaker Page feature 1 Label the button Loudspeaker Page 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 3 Touch Loudspeaker Page 4 Dial 91 5 Dial 6 6 Slide the T P switch to the center position SEB ean T P o ena arpe Ldsp o Ben EBE o Page EBE SEB 9 6 MERLIN Plus System Features 5 95 HOW TO USE If your loudspeaker paging system is connected to a CO line follow this procedure 1 Touch the loudspeaker page s line button 2 Follo
116. T P switch to the center position Jg Eastern J Office 72 o 5 152 MERLIN Plus System Features HOW TO USE In order to use the System Speed Dial feature you can use a Speed Dial code or touch a programmed button To place a call by dialing a System Speed Dial code 1 Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset 2 Dial a System Speed Dial code 60 through 89 or 900 through 999 Speaker o phone ol To place a call using a button programmed for a specific System Speed Dial code 1 Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset 2 Touch the System Speed Dial button for the particular code 3 If the special character STOP is included in a system speed dial number after you hear the second dial tone dial the System Speed Dial code again to continue the dialing Speaker O Eastern O phone m o Office 72 m MERLIN Plus System Features 5 153 Test DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE When you need to test the lights and the ringing on your voice terminal or if you need to verify that your voice terminal has been installed correctly you can use the Test Program T P switch on the left side of your voice terminal If your system administrator has administered the Program Mode Lock feature for your voice terminal you cannot use the T P switch for changing programmed features at the voice terminal However you can still use the T P switch for testing voice terminal
117. The position of the T P switch on the left side of the administrator attendant console depends on the task you are performing There are three positions and four functions as follows Position Function T up Tests lights and ringing Center Normal call handling mode P down Programming mode for the voice terminal Administration mode for the system after touching Administer or dialing 49 The functions of some buttons on the administrator attendant console change as you switch from_one mode to the_other The double entries on some of the button labels shown in and 3 3 indicate these changes in function The button s function in the normal call handling mode is shown above the line on the label and its function in administration mode is shown below the line Administration Preview 3 3 FIGURE 3 2 BIS 34D with Display as Administrator Attendant Console Display Display contrast buttons control Display Call appearance buttons E E n Test Program switch i Feature buttons Dial pad Ringer volume control aaa ia ia all aT ba eal jni i Speakerphone volume control Message light Speakerphone light HFAI light Microphone light 3 4 Administration Preview FIGURE 3 3 BIS 22 as Administrator Attendant Console Call Appearance Feature buttons Test Program switch a Dial pad Ringer Volume control am
118. a busy signal When you activate the Do Not Disturb at your voice terminal the green light goes on next to your Auto Intercom button at other people s voice terminals Calls you transfer will return to you if they are unanswered None None The Do Not Disturb feature requires a button with lights To program a Do Not Disturb button for your voice terminal 1 Label the button Do Not Disturb 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 71 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position aun T P D san Do Not uaa a EA ss E _ 71 _ 5 70 MERLIN Plus System Features HOW TO USE To prevent calls from ringing at your voice terminal 1 Touch Do Not Disturb The green light next to the button goes on 0 Do Not Disturb This feature remains active until you 1 Touch Do Not Disturb again The green light next to the button goes off Oo Do Not o Disturb MERLIN Plus System Features 5 71 Drop DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE If you get a busy signal or no answer as you setup a conference call or if you want to disconnect one outside line at a time from a conference call use the Drop feature For more information about using this feature see Conference If yo
119. accessories e Considerations Considerations include any qualifications the user should know about the hardware ways in which the equipment can or cannot be used and other hardware or features it can or cannot be used with e Administration If applicable administration procedures are given for setting options at the administrator attendant console so that people in the MERLIN Plus system can use the accessory equipment e Programming If applicable programming procedures are given for customizing the voice terminal so that people in the MERLIN Plus system can use the accessory equipment e How to Use If applicable procedures describe how to use the equipment or voice terminal Accessory Equipment 6 1 Answering Machines DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS 6 2 Accessory Equipment Answering machines can be used as back up voice mailboxes with any telephone in your MERLIN Plus system MERLIN Plus is compatible with many of the most widely used answering machines including AT amp T models 1321 and 1323 Consult the user manual supplied with your answering machine for specific information on installing your answering machine and using its features Answering machine operation requires the following considerations A General Purpose Adapter GPA is required to connect an answering machine to a MERLIN Plus system telephone See the section on General Purpose Adapters in this manual and your GPA Customer Instructio
120. ace or receive calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 73 you do not need to dial an outside number 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position T gt P Euan T P o sen Me iGo Gl sce ce mai _ MERLIN Plus System Features 5 89 HOW TO USE You can use a programmed button or a dial code to access this feature If you are using the Last Number Dial feature you can follow this procedure to have the system redial the last number you dialed 1 Without touching Speakerphone or lifting your handset touch Last Number or dial 24 if you haven t reprogrammed this as a personal speed dial code Your voice terminal speaker goes on and you hear dialing 2 When you hear the other person answer begin talking or lift your handset and begin talking A a E Last No m If the line is busy or if no one answers Speaker 1 Touch Speakerphone or hang up the handset to cancel the call Speaker o phone ol If later you want the system to redial the number touch Last Number or dial 24 again 5 90 MERLIN Plus System Features Lights DESCRIPTION The lights next to the line buttons on your MERLIN Plus system voice terminal give you immediate status of any of your lines There is also a light next to the Message button and on most voice terminals there is a light next to the Speakerphone button The lights next to the f
121. achines If intercom calls are to be answered by machine the the Voice Announcement feature must be disabled so that intercom calls will ring See Voice Announcement Enable Disable in Section 5 To use an answering machine for back up call handling on your MERLIN Plus telephone activate the Auto Answer feature when you leave the office and deactivate the feature when you return to the office Accessory Equipment 6 3 Basic Telephones DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS 6 4 Accessory Equipment Basic Touch Tone telephones can provide regular phone service and can use many of the features of your communication system using dial codes and switchhook flashes The table below shows the telephones that are compatible with the MERLIN Plus system and the possible connections Compatible Telephones Connect To Industry standard rotary AUX port BTMI Industry standard Touch Tone AUX port BTMI GPA Touch Tone with MC RCL 3178 SYS AUX port BTMI GPA Speakerphone 420 3102 420 AUX port BTMI GPA NOTE Touch Tone with MC RCL 3178 SYS models do not have a message waiting indicator You can also use accessories with your MERLIN Plus system that work similarly to basic telephones These accessories include auto dial modems facsimile machines credit phones answering telephones manual dial modems auto dialers and answering machines The following devices support these accessories e Basic Telephone and Modem Int
122. ack on the Memory Module Prevent calls from ringing while you are Programmable Dial 71 busy Requires a button with lights Prevent others from accidentally joining Programmable Dial 72 your calls Requires a button with lights Dial then touch the line buttons in Choose the order of the lines you will Programmable get when you pick up the handset the preferred ringing order Have a line ring immediately even Programmable Dial 78 though it is programmed to ring after a delay or not at all Requires a button with lights Choose a ringing sound you like for your Programmable No programming code necessary voice terminal for programming information see Section 5 Reference Dial 35 for no ring Dial 36 for delayed ring Dial 37 for immediate ring Have lines ring immediately ring after a Programmable delay or not ring at all Have intercom calls ring at your voice Programmable Dial 38 to enable voice terminal announcements Dial 39 to disable voice announcements 5 168 Quick Reference Guide to MERLIN Plus Features Preassigned or Feature Name Description Programmable Programming Code INTEROFFICE COMMUNICATION Manual Signaling Signal someone within your MERLIN Programmable Dial 6 an intercom number Plus system Preassigned The attendant touches Send Message an intercom number Message Know when the attendant has taken a message for you Preassigned Touch Send Message an intercom n
123. al Entering Administration Mode You have to enter administration mode to set up the system initially and any time you use the attendant console to administer the system Follow the boxed instructions below whenever you have to enter administration mode Entering Administration Mode To enter administration mode 1 Slide the T P switch on the left side of the console to P down The green lights next to the line buttons begin flashing The console rings every 5 seconds to remind you that it s in programming mode Touch Administer or dial 49 The green lights go off The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict Administer m 3 8 Administration Preview CONFIRMATION AND ERROR SIGNALS Leaving Administration Mode Follow the boxed instructions below when you ve finished an administration session Leaving Administration Mode To leave administration mode 1 Slide the T P switch on the left side of the console to the center position The red light goes off next to Administer and Restrict The red light goes on next to a line button Many of the administration and programming procedures described in this manual require you to enter a star code that is dial plus one or more digits Many procedures also require you to enter intercom numbers or other sequences of digits Confirmation Signal If you enter a star code that the system recognizes the console beeps twice when you touch Administer to c
124. all forwarding destination number when off site To assign the password follow this procedure 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 To create a password for a particular intercom number dial the intercom number plus any three digits except 000 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode Line Assignments for Voice Terminals 3 31 System Answer SA If there is an I entered in this row perform the following procedure to administer the incoming System Answer line s 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 75 for the System Answer incoming line group 3 Touch the line buttons until the green lights show the assignments you want line is assigned to SA line is not assigned to SA Green light on Green light off 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode If you entered a number other than 2 in the Ring Interval column for SA follow the procedure below to change the ring interval for incoming SA calls 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 764 plus the number of rings 0 through 9 NOTE If 0 is selected the voice terminal will not ring and calls will be answered immediately 3 Touch Administer The console
125. am Mode Lock feature to prevent people within the system from changing programming assignments on their voice terminals See Program Mode Lock ADMINISTRATION If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information To program a feature onto a voice terminal from the administrator attendant console 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the voice terminal you want to program 3 Touch Conference Green lights go on next to the line buttons of lines already assigned to the voice terminal 4 Follow the same steps to program the feature that you would follow if you were at the voice terminal 5 When you are finished programming the features for that voice terminal touch Conference again 6 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position T gt P o o T gt P om Administer D John 12 m Conference m 5 50 MERLIN Plus System Features PROGRAMMING None HOW TO USE None MERLIN Plus System Features 5 51 Conference DESCRIPTION When you want people outside the MERLIN Plus system to join a call in progress you can use the Conference feature You can set up a conference call that includes up to two people from outside the MERLIN Plus system up to two people within the system and yourself a total of five people CONSIDERATIO
126. am certain system features The MERLIN Plus Communications System 1 11 Section 2 Planning the System Introduction You can begin making and receiving calls as soon as your MERLIN Plus Communications System is installed But to take full advantage of the system s power you should customize it to fit your business needs Customizing the system is called administering the system throughout this manual Administering the system involves entering information into the system s memory about how you want the system to operate You enter this information by touching buttons and dialing numbers on the telephone referred to in this manual as the administrator attendant console This section of the manual helps you decide what information you want to enter into the system s memory and shows you how to record that information on forms A checklist of the forms appears below You can find copies at the end of this section Remove them now make a photocopy of each and put the originals back in this binder Keep the copies on hand so you can fill them out as you plan your system a System Configuration Form a Line Assignments Form a Call Restrictions Forms a System Speed Dial Forms NOTE In this section of the manual the information that appears before the boxes helps you make important decisions about your system Then the instructions in the boxes tell you whereto enter these decisions on the forms Introduction 2 1 System
127. am the order in which your system selects outside lines when you touch Speakerphone or lift your handset to place a call For example you can program the line you use most often to be the first line in the Automatic Line Selection sequence A line you use less often can be programmed to be the next line the system selects Then when you touch Speakerphone or lift your handset the system automatically selects the line you usually use If that line is busy the system then selects your second choice such as a WATS or Readyline unless that line is busy too and so on You can include all or only some of your outside lines in an Automatic Line Selection sequence CONSIDERATIONS If you plan to program other features when you program Automatic Line Selection you must program Automatic Line Selection first If you are already in the middle of a programming session slide the T P switch to the center position and then back to P before programming this feature The Automatic Line Selection order is only for outside lines the line selection does not include intercom lines However if you remove all outside lines from your Automatic Line Selection sequence your system will select_an intercom line when you touch Speakerphone or lift the handset See Intercom PPreference If you don t program an Automatic Line Selection sequence you will get outside lines according to the sequence in which they are plugged into the control unit ADMINISTRAT
128. ample a person may want to obtain a file before taking the call may be busy and not want to answer the call at the moment or may want the attendant to answer the call and take a message To semen a call 1 2 Touch Hold Touch Intercom and dial the intercom number of the person to whom the call may be transferred or Touch the person s Auto Intercom button Announce the call and ask if it will be accepted NOTE Ifthe person has activated the Voice Announcement Disable feature or if the person is using the intercom line at his or her voice terminal you cannot announce the call because it will ring automatically If the person chooses not to accept the call a Touch the held call s line button b Advise the caller c Hang up If the person chooses to accept the call a Advise the person to touch the appropriate line button b Hang up Amg Handling Calls 4 5 USING AUTO INTERCOM BUTTONS USING GROUP PAGE FEATURES 4 6 Handling Calls Auto Intercom buttons on your attendant console allow you to handle calls efficiently in several ways e Auto Intercom buttons allow you to quickly and easily transfer calls e The lights next to Auto Intercom buttons indicate when others in your office are using their voice terminals If the green light is on next to an Auto Intercom button it means the person at that intercom number is using the voice terminal or has activated the Do Not Disturb feature e If th
129. and put a check next to each voice terminal being assigned the Disallowed List on the Call Restrictions Assignment Form Use the following procedure to setup a Disallowed List 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict Dial 09 followed by the Disallowed List code 01 through 20 2 Dial the disallowed number up to 16 digits If the number includes wild card digits touch Hold once for each one 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode If you plan to create lists of numbers that restricted voice terminals are allowed to call you should have filled in one or more of the lists on the Allowed List Entry Form As the directory shows you can have up to eight Allowed Lists with up to 10 entries on each list To setup an Allowed List 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict Dial a and a 2 digit code 01 through 08 that corresponds to the number of the list 2 Dial the 2 digit number of the item in the Allowed List between 01 and 10 3 Dial the allowed number toll prefix and area code if necessary or exchange to be added to the list maximum eight digits 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode Systemwide Options 3 33 CALL RESTRICTIONS ASSIGNMENT FORMS 3 34 Systemwide Options
130. are planning to connect to a CO line instead of the Paging jack on the Control Unit write CO Paging under line type for the CO line you plan to use for paging HOLD DISCONNECT The MERLIN Plus system comes set for a long 450 milliseconds hold INTERVAL disconnect interval because most telephone company switching systems use the long interval If your telephone company uses a short 50 millisecond interval you ll need to reset your system to prevent calls from remaining on hold after callers have hung up Refer to Hold Disconnect Interval in Section 5 Reference for more information on how to detect the hold disconnect interval Under Hold Disconnect Interval on the Outside Telephone Lines form Check the column under Long if you want the 450 millisecond Hold Disconnect Interval Check the column under Short if you want the 50 millisecond Hold Disconnect Interval VOICE TERMINALS Each MERLIN Plus system voice terminal telephone in your system will have a 2 digit intercom number corresponding to the number of the voice terminal jack on the control unit where the voice terminal connects to the system The valid intercom numbers for a control unit with 10 voice terminal jacks are 10 through 19 For a control unit with 20 voice terminal jacks the valid intercom numbers are 10 through 29 The jack locations are illustrated on a label to the left of the modules in the control unit
131. assignments on their voice terminals See Program Mode Lock The system administrator can program features onto individual voice terminals A the Centralized Programming feature See Programming Individual feature programming codes are provided in programming instructions in the reference description for each programmable feature and in Section 6 Quick Reference Guides To program a feature onto your voice terminal 1 Type or print on the button label strips all the names of the features you want to program Then insert the labels into the appropriate slots on your voice terminal 2 Slide the T P Test Program switch on the left side of the voice terminal to the P Program position The green lights next to the buttons begin flashing The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 3 Consult the programming instructions in the specific feature s entry in this section or use the codes listed in thel Quick Reference Guides at the end of this section to determine the feature s programming code You can also refer to the MERLIN Plus System User s Guide for programming codes MERLIN Plus System Features 5 115 4 Touch the first button you want to program 5 Dial the required programming code and any other numbers required 6 Touch the second button you want to program and dial the required programming code and numbers Cont
132. ave another system voice terminal pick up the held call Your voice terminal is faulty contact your equipment supplier 7 8 Troubleshooting Procedures SYMPTOM UNSUCCESSFUL ATTEMPTS TO USE BUSY BUSTER Possible Cause 2 The Hold Disconnect Interval setting is different than the local telephone company s central office Reference for instructions to change the setting to 450 milliseconds long or 50 milliseconds short for each incoming line Do This If Then Refer to Hold Disconnect The Hold Disconnect You ve solved the problem in Section 5 Interval is set to 450 milliseconds long and callers are no longer disconnected when placed on hold The Hold Disconnect Interval is set to 50 milliseconds short and the light indicating a held call no longer flashes after the caller hangs up The light continues to flash after a caller has hung up You ve solved the problem Contact your equipment supplier for assistance Possible Cause 1 Busy Buster is not connected to the port that is administered for it Do This Check the location of the BB cord and compare its jack number with the jack number that was administered for BB The cord is plugged into a jack other than the one administered for BB Then Move the BB cord to the administered jack or administer the jack assignment to the current cord location Possible Cause 2 Returning Bu
133. be answered immediately and subsequent calls will automatically be answered after the administered number of rings When the system is first set up up to eight lines can be answered by SA and the caller will hear two rings before the SA message When administering an alternate attendant position this feature must be turned off This feature cannot be copied using the Copy administration procedure If copying is attempted the receiving voice terminal will have an empty button in the corresponding position NOTE If the system has System Answer active along with either the CF DXD or RLA features and the assigned incoming line groups overlap the CF DXD or RLA features will take precedence System Answer feature must be deactivated when assigning the line groups If an Alternate Attendant is assigned after the System Answer line groups are assigned the line groups remain the same even if the line does not appear at the Alternate Attendant position However the line cannot be answered at the Alternate Attendant position if it does not appear there Also if a call is ringing on a line that does not appear on the console defined as the attendant touching SA will not answer the call System Answer cannot be used in conjunction with a MERLIN Attendant See the MERLIN Plus MERLIN Attendant User s Guide 5 138 MERLIN Plus System Features ADMINISTRATION Follow the administration procedure under Automatic System Access jin
134. beeps twice 4 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode If you put an entry in the column headed Modify Message for SA follow the procedure below 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 77 and the message number desired No voice message call is placed on hold immediately Message says Please hold Message says Please hold Your call will be handled momentarily 0 l 3 Touch Administer 4 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode This concludes outside line administration You can go on now to Systemwide Options or you can leave further administration for another time 3 32 Line Assignments for Voice Terminals Systemwide Options CALL RESTRICTIONS TO VOICE TERMINALS DISALLOWED LIST ALLOWED LISTS Now that your MERLIN Plus system is up and running you can continue with system administration at a pace that best suits your work schedule Under this heading you ll find a menu of options and features from which to choose When your system is first installed all voice terminals are unrestricted The Call Restrictions Assignment Form should show whether you plan to restrict any of your voice terminals or assign Disallowed or Allowed Lists If you plan to prevent all or some voice terminals from making billable calls you should have filled in one or more entries on the Disallowed List Entry Form
135. ber of the second person you want to include in the conference 5 52 MERLIN Plus System Features 4 Announce the conference call through your speaker or handset 5 Touch Conference 6 Touch the line button for the line that you put on hold C Fa Emz To rejoin the call 1 Touch a line button associated with the call E 555 1234 m To disconnect one participant from the call 1 Touch Drop 2 Touch the button of the line you want to disconnect Drop m E 555 1234 o To add someone inside the system to the conference call 1 Dial the person s intercom number to request that he or she pick up the line that the conference call is on See E Intercom m MERLIN Plus System Features 5 53 Copy DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION If there are two or more voice terminals that require identical feature assignments the system administrator can use the Copy feature to copy the line and programmable feature assignments from one voice terminal onto another When the administrator uses the Copy feature the MERLIN Plus system copies the line assignments from one voice terminal to the other Feature assignments are always overwritten by lines Several other features are also copied during the Copy process Ringing Options Voice Announcement Enable Disable Automatic Line Selection Personalized Ringing Button Free feature and Call Restrictions except
136. bers on a Call Report The general method is recommended for businesses that have many accounts or in which there is no central accounting organization and users must invent their own codes e Option A The General Method The general method of entering an account number on a Call Report is to use a programmed Account Number Entry button While you have a call in progress you simply touch the Account Number Entry button a light goes on beside the button so that you know the account number will be entered and dial all the digits of the account number You can also program buttons or speed dial codes for frequently used account numbers If necessary you can dial extra numbers for subaccounts e Option B The Quick Method The quick method of entering an account number on a Call Report is to dial a System Speed Dial code 60 through 89 or 900 through 999 that the system administrator has stored in the system see System Speed Dial or a 3 character Personal Speed Dial code that you have assigned to an account number see Personal Speed Dial While you have a call in progress you simply dial the speed dial code that corresponds with the account code You can dial the code with one touch by programming a System Speed Dial or Personal Speed Dial button This feature can be used only with outside calls it cannot be used with intercom calls If the system administrator has specified that the Call Report feature does not rep
137. button for the new jack goes on Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial 83 Dial one digit 0 through 9 for the minimum number of minutes NOTE The system adds 10 seconds to the number of minutes you select Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial 84 Dial the code for the calls reported option you wane 0 no calls reported 1 outgoing calls only 2 outgoing and incoming calls Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial the code for the report or set of reports you want 60 for one system administration report and individual phone reports 61 for a system administration report 62 plus touch one or more Auto Intercom buttons or dial one or more intercom numbers for individual phone reports 63 to abort a printout and cancel all other report requests Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode continued Quick Reference Guide to System Administration 3 43 Administration Procedure Designate a voice terminal jack on the control unit for System Feature Reports Program a telephone using Centralized Programming Lock the programming function at a voice terminal Designate a voice terminal jack on the control unit for Busy Buster Enter administration mode D
138. button on a voice terminal 1 Label the button CF DXD 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you re programming and that you can t place or receive calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 83 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position aan aan T e P ann nee E 83 _ HOW TO USE Using the CF DXD Button Touching the CF DXD button repeatedly cycles the system through DXD CF and normal modes The red and green lights next to the CF DXD button will help you recognize which mode the system is in Green and red light off Normal mode Only green light on DXD mode Only red light on CF mode Red light flashing Problem with CF If the red light next to the CF DXD button is flashing notify the system administrator who should refer to Section 7 Troubleshooting To return to CF mode after an error has been corrected 1 Touch CF DXD three times The first time puts the system in normal mode the second touch of the button puts the system in DXD mode the third touch puts the system in CF mode E CF DXD m CF DXD o E CF DXD m 5 38 MERLIN Plus System Features Call Forwarding Remote Line Access Disconnect Timer DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE The Call Forwarding Remote Line Access Disconnect Timer is used in conjunction with the Call Forwarding and Remote Line Access feat
139. button will help you recognize which mode the system is in Green and red light off Normal mode Only green light on DXD mode Only red light on CF mode 5 62 MERLIN Plus System Features Disallowed List DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION Most businesses find it inappropriate for their employees to make billable calls to numbers such as those beginning with the 976 exchange or the 900 area code for services such as comedy weather sports lottery and chatlines The Disallowed List feature enables you to deny access to up to 20 area codes exchanges and entire numbers even on unrestricted lines If a voice terminal has been assigned a disallowed number any attempt to dial that number will not go through As soon as the dialed digits match any complete disallowed number dialing is blocked The only exception to this is if a System Speed Dial number with Restriction override matches a number on the Disallowed List the number will go through see System Speed Dial for more details The Disallowed List can contain 20 numbers up to 16 digits each This allows you to deny access to virtually any number combination including area code exchange and foreign numbers You can enter wild card digits which are pauses in the administration procedure by touching the Hold button The pauses can be used to represent any area code or combination you require For example to prevent calls to the 97
140. buttons to the right of the dial pad If you are using a BIS 22 or BIS 22D voice terminal as the administrator attendant console the voice terminal is automatically y assigned the following features when you initially set up the MERLIN Plus system e Lines are assigned to 4 of the 10 buttons above the dial pad if the control unit has one line module e Lines are assigned to 8 of the 10 buttons above the dial pad if the control unit has two line modules e Auto Intercom buttons for intercom numbers 10 through 19 are assigned to the top 10 buttons in the column of buttons to the right of the dial pad e If your system has more than 10 voice terminals intercom numbers 20 through 29 you will not have buttons at the console for these voice terminals Therefore when you administer Group Page Program Mode Lock or program the Allowed and Disallowed Lists you need to dial a code from the Dial Code Chart that corresponds with the voice terminal When using the dial codes you do not touch an Auto Intercom button Dial codes are not the same as intercom numbers Dial Code Chart If the Intercom Dial this If the intercom Dial this number k code number is code Intercom 20 Intercom 25 Intercom 21 Intercom 26 Intercom 22 Intercom 27 Intercom 23 Intercom 28 Intercom 24 Intercom 29 THE BIS 10 VOICE TERMINAL USED AS AN ADMINISTRATOR CONSOLE ADMINISTRATION MODE For example if you want to assign voice terminal 21 to a
141. calls You can place a toll call restriction on their voice terminals The system will allow local calls from those voice terminals but will ignore attempts to dial long distance numbers Then if there are certain areas of the country these people have to call on business you can set up an Allowed List of those long distance area codes and assign the list to the toll restricted voice terminals when you administer the system You can also mark selected long distance telephone numbers for Restriction Override and store them under Speed Dial codes in the system s memory Then anyone in your system including those with toll restricted voice terminals can use the Speed Dial codes to dial those long distance numbers Under Toll Restricted on the Call Restrictions Assignment Form Put a check mark next to the intercom number of each voice terminal that will be restricted from making long distance calls Call Restrictions Forms 2 19 OUTWARD RESTRICTED ALLOWED LISTS 2 20 Call Restrictions Forms Some people in your business may have little need to make any outside calls either local or long distance During system administration you can place an outward call restriction on their voice terminals and the system will ignore attempts to dial outside telephone numbers from those voice terminals Then if you want these people to be able to make local calls in business or personal emergencies you can assign them an Allowed List of l
142. can dial regardless of any previously placed restrictions dial the System Speed Dial code such as 67 or 936 92 and then the telephone number 4 Dial the telephone number If you want the number to be private so that only the dial code appears on Call Reports and on display voice terminals insert a before the telephone number However private numbers do appear on System Feature Reports For example for a private number with Restriction Override dial a System Speed Dial code such as 67 or 936 92 and a telephone number with a before it such as 1 617 555 1234 5 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 6 Repeat the last four steps for each telephone number to which you are assigning a System Speed Dial code 7 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position PET an ann m maa nua ana O wm o Administer o ass Bas aan o Administer ol EE 900 999 90 or 92 tel no PROGRAMMING To program a button for a System Speed Dial code assigned to a telephone number 1 Label the button with a name and or a number 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 95 plus a System Speed Dial code number from 60 through 89 and 900 through 999 that your administrator can give you 5 Slide the
143. ce terminal jack on the control unit a connection must have been made from that voice terminal jack to the BB jack on the memory module and a button must be programmed at each applicable voice terminal The Busy Buster feature is shared by everyone in the MERLIN Plus system When you and other people in your system use this feature at the same time the system places the telephone number each person has dialed in a queue The system then dials each number in the queue The system redials the call on the same line on which the call was placed If you use a stop character in the dialing sequence of a System Speed Dial number you cannot use Busy Buster to retry the number for you Each person in the system can have only one Busy Buster number active at a time If you or someone else places or accepts another call on a voice terminal that has activated Busfy Buster the system will continue to try to complete the call even though your voice terminal is in use When the BB call goes through the voice terminal will alert you with an abbreviated ring even if you re on another call If you are using an SP 34 or an SP 34D voice terminal Busy Buster can only be programmed onto one of the two rows of buttons above the dial pad Occasionally when Busy Buster is activated the voice terminal rings even when the call was not connected This is due to noisy Central Office lines that can provide false indications to the MERLIN Plus system When a Bu
144. come in after hours by programming a Call Pickup button so that he or she can pickup calls that come in at the administrator attendant console Since the attendant console has all the lines of your MERLIN Plus system the person answering calls after hours can pick up calls by touching the Call Pickup button whenever the attendant console rings See Call Pickup lin Section 5 Reference If the person is in another part of the building the attendant can connect his or her console and an extra alert device to a Supplementary Alert Adapter See Supplementary Alert Adapter under FAccessory Equipment in Section 5 Reference so that each time a call comes in an extra alert device goes on e Your system administrator can also administer and activate the Call Forwarding feature for after hours use When the system is in Call Forwarding mode incoming calls on designated lines are connected to a Voice Synthesis Processor VSP in the control unit for a message that informs the caller that the call will be forwarded While the caller is listening to the message the control unit calls the telephone number to which calls are being forwarded and uses the system s Conference feature to connect the incoming call to the outgoing call For more information about this feature refer to Automatic System Access in Section 5 Reference ACTIVATING SYSTEM ANSWER USING AN ALTERNATE ATTENDANT CONSOLE USING THE HEADSET
145. control unit is not Go to Possible Cause 3 plugged into a switch controlled outlet See if you can plug the control unit into an outlet that is not controlled by a switch If the control unit is plugged into a switch controlled outlet turn on the switch continued Troubleshooting Procedures 7 7 Possible Cause 3 Faulty power outlet Test the outlet by plugging The appliance doesn t work The outlet is faulty in an appliance such as a lamp or a radio The appliance works Go to Possible Cause 4 Possible Cause 4 A module is loose Do This If Then Set the control unit power All modules are secure and You ve solved the problem switch to Off the red warning light goes off NOTE You will damage the All modules are secure and Contact your equipment modules if you don t turn the the red warning light supplier When calling your power off remains on supplier identify your system as the MERLIN Plus Remove the top cover and R2 system then remove and replace each module making sure each is securely seated in its slot Replace the top cover and fasten its screw Set the power switch back to On SYMPTOM PROBLEM Possible Cause 1 Call was inadvertently placed on exclusive hold WITH CALLS ON HOLD Do This Then At the voice terminal that put The trouble no longer The call was placed on the call on hold touch the appears Exclusive Hold button of the held call The trouble still appears H
146. ctions If you experience trouble because your equipment is malfunctioning the FCC requires that the equipment not be used and that it be disconnected from the network until the problem has been corrected Repairs to this equipment can only be made by the manufacturers their authorized agents or by others who may be authorized by the FCC FCC Notification and Repair Information 1 1 5 Rights of the Local Telephone Company If this equipment causes harm to the telephone network the telephone company may discontinue your service temporarily If possible they will notify you in advance If advance notice is not practical you will be notified as soon as possible You will also be informed of your right to file a complaint with the FCC Your local telephone company may make changes in its facilities equipment operations or procedures that affect the proper functioning of this equipment If they do you will be notified in advance to give you an opportunity to maintain uninterrupted service 6 Hearing Aid Compatibility The custom telephone sets for this system are compatible with inductively coupled hearing aids 1 2 FCC Notification and Repair Information Quick Start Procedure IF YOU RE IN A HURRY If you need to make and receive calls the moment your MERLIN Plus system is installed and before you ve had time to learn how to implement the entire system this Quick Start information is for you Follow this short procedu
147. ctories and advertisements e Line D is a WATS line to the distant area where most of your company s suppliers are located e Line E is a foreign exchange FX line to the distant city where the company s headquarters are located e Line F is a general purpose line with an unpublished telephone number that the branch manager wants as a personal line shows how these lines appear on all voice terminals before you customize line assignments Now let s consider the following facts about the calling requirements of three people in the office the buyer the branch manager and the clerk e Most of the buyer s outgoing calls are to suppliers in the area served by the WATS line and to the purchasing and accounting departments at company headquarters The buyer receives relatively few incoming calls but they are usually important e The branch manager calls company headquarters often and wants a personal line for other calls e The clerk handles most of the incoming calls from customers and prospective customers and has no need to call suppliers or the headquarters offices Line Assignments Form 2 11 Figure 2 2 shows how you might customize the line assignments on the buyer s the manager s and the clerk s voice terminals to best meet their individual needs and responsibilities FIGURE 2 2 Customized Line Assignments oo oo LS w j Oo i EE D e Line C i R ai Line C a Line B p
148. de for the volume you want 16 to turn off the background music 17 to set the volume to low 18 to set the volume to medium 19 to set the volume to high Or use the music source volume control instead Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial 80 Dial two digits for the month 01 through 12 two for the day 01 through 31 and two for the year 00 through 99 Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial 81 Dial two digits for the hour 00 through 23 and two for the minute 00 through 59 Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode continued 3 42 Quick Reference Guide to System Administration Administration Procedure Designate a telephone jack on the control unit for Call Reports Set the minimum call duration for Call Report records Set the calls reported option for Call Reports Print a System Feature Report Do This Enter administration mode Dial 82 The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button for the jack to which the data collector and printer are currently assigned Touch the Auto Intercom button for the new telephone jack to which you are assigning the data collector and printer The green light goes off next to the Auto Intercom button for the old jack and the green light next to the Auto Intercom
149. de only 5 Button voice terminal 1 7 administration of 3 11 O O OOOO O description of on System Configuration Form with Button Free line operation 5 setting the system forj 3 49 222 OE with copy dialing 3 37 with headset6 15_ C ONOOOOOCOCOC C C C dSASSA features administering jack assignment 3 14 lt with send message 5 132 CCS jack with Direct Extension Dialing 5 59 assign Button Free line operation 2 14 SY A assign codes to account numbers 3 36 oo to telephone numbers assign privacy to line A or Epa o S S assigning lines b48 a to a voice terminal to buttons order of to the system 3 24 o O attendant assign an alternate to handle ASA calls attendant console alternate using Auto Intercom buttons abbreviated ringing accessory equipment 6 1H 6 24 gt accessory faulty 7 1 ooo o account numbers assigning System Speed Dial codes to account number entry 5 3 assign System Speed Dial codes to button description of 5 3 maximum number of characters available with Call Report with One Touch 5 I71 CCCs with System Speed Dial es adapter BIS 22 voice terminal used for See General Purpose Adapter BIS 34 voice terminal used for aooo administering the system BIS 34D voice terminal used for description of description of 4 1 H with customized line assignments 5 ringing options 4 8 administration 3 2 speakerphone opl 0 S definit
150. diate ring on a line setting no ring on a line with conference 5 52__ S with hold retrieve C Call Forwarding See also CF DXD after hours use 4 8 o Call Forwarding Remote Line Access Disconnect Timer Call Pickup 5 40 45 42 5 101 5 166 5 171 _ button 4 8 5 101 using a Call Pickup button using a dial code for using a One Touch Call Pickup button with customized line assignments 5 56 with One Touch 2 24 3 12 5 43H 5 47 5 167 6 9 _ pa eee 12 14 3 38 5 28 5 30 ae Call Report 2 23 12 set control unit jack 3 set minimum call duratian set type of calls printed 3 setting calls re pord omien setting date setting time 3 settings on System eS Report 5 142 ss System Speed Dial codes with 5 44 type of calls documented voice terminal jack 19 reserved for 2 7 ssid with account number entr 5 3 H 5 5 with System Speed Dial call restriction 3 39 5 6 5 48H5 49 7 2 _ _ Bat o ooo automatic reset 5 17 outward call restriction reset 5 48 toll call restriction and Allowed Lists Forms 5 8__ C O O O O lt assigning to voice terminals Call Restriction Assignment Form 2 31 Call Restriction Forms 2 1 2 18 call restriction calls rransferring cancel the call with speaker for Program Mode Lock from large to small voice terminal 5 54 ssid line assig
151. don t ring they still can pickup lines that appear on the voice terminal NOTE Lines that appear on all telephones in your MERLIN Plus system must be administered for No Ring at any telephone that has an answering machine If one answering machine is to be used to take messages for all telephones in your system then all telephones should be administered for immediate ring If you decide that you want a line that you have programmed for delayed ring or no ring to temporarily ring immediately program the Ring Override feature See Ring Override None 5 128 MERLIN Plus System Features PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE To program the line ringing option you prefer 1 Slide the T P switch to P 2 Touch the line button for which you want to program immediate delayed or no ringing 3 Dial one of these codes for the type of ringing you want the line to have gt Dial 35 for no ring The red light next to the line button goes off gt Dial 36 for delayed ring The red light next to the line button flashes gt Dial 37 for immediate ring The red light next to the line button goes on steady 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each line button you want to program 5 When you are finished programming slide the T P switch to the center position mare p a m 555 1234 D m D Even if you program the lines on your voice terminal not to ring you can tell if a call comes in for you because the green light next
152. e The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 84 3 Dial a number code 0 through 2 to specify the kind of calls to be reported gt If you do not want any calls reported dial 0 gt If you only want outgoing calls reported dial 1 gt If you want outgoing and incoming calls reported dial 2 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode Once you ve selected the type of report you need to specify the duration of the calls reported If you filled in 1 next to Minimum Duration of Recorded Calls you don t have to do anything here since the system is set for one minute MUSIC ON HOLD BACKGROUND MUSIC If you specified another duration 0 or 2 through 9 follow this procedure 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 83 3 Dial one digit from 0 to 9 for the number of minutes 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode If you have an optional audio source and want to control the volume through system administration locate the column headed Music on Hold on the System Configuration Form then dial the appropriate code given in the procedure below 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial one of the following codes to set the volume you prefer
153. e and finds that the Send Message dial code is 04 Then from a BIS 22 console the attendant touches Send Message and dials 04 to light the message light NOTE To turn off a message light at a voice terminal repeat the steps above go Bua Send m REE C Message mna 03 22 MERLIN Plus System Features 5 133 Speaker DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE If your voice terminal does not have a speakerphone button you can use your voice terminal speaker when you have dialed a call or been put on hold to monitor a line without lifting your handset You can also allow others in your office to hear a conversation while you have a call in progress There are three main ways to use your speaker e On Hook Dialing Without lifting your handset turn on the voice terminal speaker and dial an outside or intercom number You can also use the one touch dialing features for this purpose See One Touch Dialing e Monitor on Hold If someone puts you on hold you can turn on your voice terminal speaker hang up and continue working until the person returns to the call e Group Listening By turning on your voice terminal speaker during a telephone conversation you can allow others in your office to hear a call This feature is not available on the BIS models When you touch an Outside Auto Dial button or an Auto Intercom button your voice terminal speaker automatically goes on and
154. e another voice terminal jack for Busy Buster during system administration or you may choose not to use the BB feature and assign intercom number 19 to a voice terminal For more information on Busy Buster see the entry for in Section 5 Reference Under Voice Terminals Do not write in a name next to intercom number 19 if you plan to use the Busy Buster feature Cross out BB next to intercom number 19 if you plan to deactivate Busy Buster during system administration or if you plan to assign it to a different intercom number Intercom number 19 will still be reserved for the data collector and printer which are used to print reports You can then treat intercom number 19 just like any other intercom number when you assign intercom numbers to voice terminals at the appropriate point in this planning sequence If you are assigning BB to a different intercom number write BB next to the intercom number you plan to use instead of intercom number 19 Notice that Reports also appears in parentheses in the Name column next to intercom 19 on the form If your system has the Call Report option intercom 19 is automatically reserved for the data collector and printer required to print this report If your system also has BB both features can share the same port with the use of the adapter supplied with the data collector You can designate an intercom number other than 19 for the Call Report or System Fea
155. e control unit jack for the Busy Buster feature jack number assigned to BB 3 48 Quick Reference Guide to Administration continued Administration Code Other Numbers Buttons Feature ee 36 50 the line button s for the line s on Modify the Call Forwarding Direct Extension Dialing which you want the modified message Remote Line Access or System Answer voice messages for one or more lines in your CF DXD RLA or SA the telephone number you want to Aer incoming line groups include in the message 5 the line buttons of the lines you want Select lines that will be included in the Call Forwarding to add to or remove from the group incoming line group 52 the line buttons of the lines you want Choose lines that will compose the Call Forwarding to add to or remove from the group outgoing line group 53 the new Call Forwarding destination Enter or change the telephone number to which you want telephone number calls forwarded 54 the line buttons of the lines you want Select lines that will be included in the Remote Line to add to or remove from the group Access incoming line group 56 the ASA password a MERLIN Plus Choose at least one valid 5 digit password so that you can system intercom number plus any three gain access to an outside line using Remote Line Access or digits change the current call forward number from a remote location 57 line A or E only Assign Privacy to Line A or E 58 the line button
156. e green light next to the person s Auto Intercom button is flashing it means that the person is calling you Be sure to type or write the names of the people in your office on the appropriate Auto Intercom buttons To call someone in your MERLIN Plus system with one touch 1 Touch the Auto Intercom button for the person you want to call 2 When you hear the person answer begin speaking into your speakerphone or lift the handset and begin speaking Susan 15 o The Group Page feature allows you to make announcements to groups of people or to page individuals for calls When a call comes in you can put the call on hold and page the person for whom the call is intended To use a programmed button to make an announcement through a group of voice terminal speakers 1 Touch the Group Page button for the group you want to page 2 When you hear a beep touch Speakerphone or lift your handset and make the announcement O Group o ay Speaker o Page phone To page a group using a dial code 1 Touch Intercom 2 Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset 3 Dial a code for the group you want to page 70 Page All all voice terminals in the system 71 group 1 72 group 2 4 When you hear a beep begin speaking naa o k naa o Intercom m 0O Phone rs ol BER 70 72 USING THE SEND MESSAGE FEATURE When someone in the MERLIN Plus system has a message you can turn on the Message light at the person s voice t
157. e has been programmed on the button you have touched Last Number If the button has not been programmed the message below appears on your display screen Blank MERLIN Plus System Features 5 67 If you touch a preassigned or nonprogrammable button such as Conference or Hold the following message appears on the display screen Not Programmable or Error NOTE You can use nonprogrammable buttons such as Hold or Recall to enter a special character such as a pause or a stop into a dialing sequence Number Dialed When you dial outside intercom or account numbers or touch a button that contain numbers such as an Outside Auto Dial Auto Intercom Last Number Redial or Saved Number Redial button the digits associated with that button are printed on the display screen 5551234 The combined display screens in the Display Number Dialed feature can contain up to 16 digits It does not set the time and date for the Call Report and System Feature Report features Time Keeping Features The time keeping features of the display unit allow you to set an alarm clock calendar and timer e Setting the Clock and Calendar Clock calendar display screen 12 01a Su 10 A Alarm on indicator A Clock Calendar B To set the time day and date on the display screen a Press Set until the item you want to change flashes b Press Fwd or Rev to advance or reverse the time day or date c Whe
158. e light next to the Message button is on your MERLIN Plus system attendant has a message for you Your Message light can only be turned on from the administrator attendant console If the attendant is using a BIS 22 and the system has more than 10 voice terminals refer to for directions on sending a message to voice terminals in the system 5 button voice terminals do not have a Message button None None The system attendant can touch Message to turn on the light next to the Message button at a person s voice terminal 1 At the administrator attendant console touch Send Message 2 Touch the Auto Intercom button for the person s voice terminal The red light next to the Auto Intercom button goes on indicating the person s light is lit O sen E 0 Peake oj Susan 15 oO A person can turn off the Message light on his or her voice terminal The system attendant can also turn off the light at a voice terminal by repeating the two steps above O MERLIN Plus System Features 5 99 Monitor on Hold DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE This feature is only for use with voice terminals that have a speaker button but not a speakerphone button When someone puts your call on hold you can turn on your voice terminal s built in speaker hang up and continue working while you wait for the person to return to the call None None None To turn on your speaker until
159. e no voice message so that incoming SA calls are immediately placed on hold Under Modify Message in the SA row Write a 0 if you do not want the voice message Write a 1 if you want the message just to say Please hold Write a 2 if you want the message to say Please hold Your call will be handled momentarily Write the incoming phone number if you want the longer message preceded with the phrase You have reached number You should now have a completed Line Assignments Form Keep it in a place where you can find it when you want to administer the system or program individual voice terminals Line Assignments Form 2 17 Call Restrictions Forms DISALLOWED LIST 2 18 Call Restrictions Forms You can use call restrictions to prevent some or all voice terminals from making outside calls both local and long distance You can also use the Disallowed List to prevent some or all voice terminals from making billable calls to 900 numbers the 976 exchange or other numbers as desired NOTE System Speed Dial with Restriction Override which can be used as a password to access an otherwise restricted number takes precedence over Disallowed List Disallowed List takes precedence over everything else You can use Allowed Lists of numbers and or special Speed Dial codes to permit call restricted voice terminals to call specified telephone numbers local exchanges or area codes B
160. e number or put a check mark in the account column if the number is an account number NOTE Do not assign the same System Speed Dial code to both a telephone number and an account number To prevent confusion when entering both account numbers and telephone numbers reserve codes 60 through 89 for telephone numbers and 900 through 949 for account numbers or vice versa Also it may be helpful to use the last four digits of a firm s telephone number to create an account number so the account number can be easily identified In the Name column Write the name of the person or organization to identify each number When you encode the telephone numbers during system administration you can mark some or all of them for Restriction Override Then people with restricted voice terminals or voice terminals that have been assigned a Disallowed List can call these marked numbers by dialing the System Speed Dial codes In the Restriction Override column Put a check mark on the line for each telephone number you want to mark for Restriction Override when you administer the system You should now have a complete set of planning forms Keep them together in a safe place until you are ready to install and administer your system MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms The following forms are shown in this section e System Configuration e Line Assignments e Call Restrictions e System Speed Dial Please make copie
161. e original line assignments you can use the procedure in the entry forl Customized Line Assignments in Section 5 Reference to give that voice terminal the original line assignments 3 Leave administration mode 3 24 Line Assignments for Voice Terminals CUSTOMIZED LINE ASSIGNMENTS On the Line Assignments form the numbers through 8 on the top row to the right of the intercom numbers should show how you plan to customize the line assignments to voice terminals Customizing a voice terminal s line assignments is simply a matter of removing and adding lines But keep the following points in mind e On every voice terminal except a 5 button model the button directly above Conference is always the Intercom button You can t assign a line or feature to it e On every voice terminal except a 5 button model the button above Transfer is always a programmable feature button You can t assign a line to it e When you assign lines to a voice terminal the system assigns them to line buttons in the order shown in Figure 3 8 below This sequence is also the voice terminal s automatic line selection sequence the order in which the system selects lines for the voice terminal s outgoing calls unless you program a different automatic line selection sequence On any voice terminal line buttons without lines assigned to them can have feature buttons programmed on them FIGURE 3 8 The order in which the system as
162. e purchase of a larger MERLIN system The paragraphs that follow offer a brief introduction to the system s control unit and voice terminals The optional equipment you can add to your system is described under the heading Accessory Equipment in Section 5 Reference The control unit is the system s brain It manages all incoming outgoing and intercom call traffic It makes all of the system s decisions and controls all of the system s responses For an illustration of the control unit with its major components labeled see Administration Preview in Section 3 Administering the System A voice terminal is a MERLIN system telephone that provides basic telephone functions and allows you to take advantage of the special MERLIN system features All voice terminals have buttons for fixed features such as Conference Drop Transfer and Hold They differ from one another in the number of buttons above and to the right of the dial pad that can be used for outside lines and programmable features The 10 button voice terminal with the HFAI designation has the hands free intercom feature Voice terminals with SP or BIS designations also have the hands free answer on intercom feature and a built in speakerphone For more information on using basic telephones with the MERLIN Plus system see Basic Telephones in Section 5 Reference Your MERLIN Plus system works best with the following v
163. e voice terminal is Change the ringing option by Administering the System programmed not to ring following the instructions in to learn how to administer Section 3 Administering ringing options the System The voice terminal is Go to Possible Cause 3 programmed to ring Possible Cause 3 Do Not Disturb feature is activated Do This If Then Refer to The feature is activated Deactivate the feature to see if the following the instructions in Do Not Disturb feature is Section 5 Reference jor activated see the DO Not Disturb entry in the MERLIN Plus System User s Guide The feature is not activated Refer to the troubleshooting procedure for the symptom Trouble with voice terminal lights speakers and ringing SYMPTOM TROUBLE WITH VOICE TERMINAL LIGHTS SPEAKER AND RINGING Possible Cause 1 Cable connection power supply or voice terminal Do This If Then Slide the T P switch on the side of the voice terminal to the T position and hold it there All the red and green lights flash alternately and a tone sounds continually Some red and green lights flash continually and or a tone sounds at irregular intervals The voice terminal is working properly Go to Possible Cause 3 The trouble is caused by either the voice terminal or the cable connection Go to Possible Cause 2 None of the lights turn on and a tone sounds continually or irregularly
164. each incoming line in the system Follow the procedure below to administer a short hold disconnect interval 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 69 3 Touch each incoming line button to change the disconnect interval Green light on line assigned the long disconnect interval Green light off line assigned the short disconnect interval 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode VOICE TERMINAL JACK Your MERLIN Plus system has twenty jacks for voice terminals and special ASSIGNMENTS features If you are using the ASA features CF DXD RLA or SA Busy Buster BB Call Report or System Feature Report Reports you need to assign a jack for them The Voice Terminal form indicates the default jack assignments for these features and the main attendants if you have changed these assignments on your form use the appropriate procedure below to change the jack assignments accordingly NOTE You cannot reassign any of the following features to jack 10 since it is reserved for the main attendant Changing the Automatic System Access ASA jack assignment 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 59 The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button of the jack assigned to ASA 3 Perform one of the following procedures gt Touch the Auto Int
165. eature buttons on your voice terminal indicate the on off status of the feature programmed on that button Lights Red light steady Line Status This is either the line you are now using or the line you will get when you touch Speakerphone or lift your handset Green light steady Green light flashing Green light flashing rapidly Green light flashing slowly Alternating flashing red and green lights on a line you are using Green light on next to the Message button Green light on next to the Speakerphone button Green light on next to the HFAI Mic button on a BIS 10 or 10 Button HFAI voice terminal or next to the HFAI button on any other BIS or HFAI voice terminal Green light on next to the Speakerphone and Microphone buttons on any BIS voice terminal Green light on next to the Call Forwarding Direct Extension Dialing CF DXD button This line is busy or the feature is activated This is the line on which a call is coming in This is the line of a call you have put on hold This is the line of a call someone else has put on hold from another voice terminal Someone in the system has bridged onto your call This means that the attendant has a message waiting for you This means that the voice terminal speaker is on Without lifting the handset you can begin dialing or you can hear a conversation through the speaker You can answer and speak to others on intercom calls without lifti
166. ected to a CO line 1 Touch the loudspeaker page s line button 2 Follow the instructions provided with your loudspeaker page system 3 If your loudspeaker page system provides a warning tone beep wait for the tone before making your announcement Music on Hold MOH and Background Music DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS When you have Music on Hold you can provide background music for callers whom you have placed on hold The Music on Hold MOH Jack is an RCA type phonograph jack into which you can plug an audio system It is on the front of the control unit behind the top cover under the red warning and the green power lights as seen in Figure 6 9 NOTE Users of equipment that rebroadcasts copyrighted music or other material may be required to obtain a copyright license from a third party such as ASCAP or BMI FIGURE 6 10 An Audio System connected to the Music on Hold Jack MOH on the MERLIN Pius system control unit RCA type phone jack to MOH jack MERLIN Plus control unit Music on Hold MOH jack Audio system N c 0 0O To control the loudness of the Music on Hold and the background music for the building the system administrator can dial a code at the administrator attendant voice terminal for the preferred volume The administrator can also turn off the Music on Hold and background music by entering a code at the administrator attendant console The system is factory set for medium music volu
167. ed incorrectly or unanswered The Alternate Attendant cannot be designated if your system has a MERLIN Attendant The System Answer SA feature must be off when assigning the alternate attendant position If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this section To assign an alternate attendant position 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 79 3 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the voice terminal you want to assign as the alternate attendant console 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P to the center position ann PA HARI EEE 2 uto o Administer D re Intercom T oe K T P E a Administer m MERLIN Plus System Features 5 9 PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE If you will be using the System Answer feature see later in this section you must program the SA button Only the attendant or the alternate attendant can have the SA button 1 Label the button System Answer 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 58 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position T e P I an Answer _ To activate System Answer from the Alternate Attendant position
168. ee the information that comes with the GPA Originating a Call e Use the Basic Operation switch position if you only originate calls with your telephone or data device You may also answer incoming calls using your telephone or data device However incoming calls ring only at your voice terminal not at the telephone or data device Using an Automatic Answering Device e Use the Automatic Operation switch position for using automatic answering devices Before operating these devices program an Auto Answer All feature button so you can set the devices to go on automatically when you receive ringing calls Headset and Headset Adapter DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE A Headset connected to your voice terminal by way of the Headset Adapter allows you to handle calls more easily See FIGURE 6 7 A headset connected to the headset adapter A headset cannot be used with a 5 button or a lo button HFAI voice terminal The cord on the headset is plugged into the headset adapter and the voice terminal and the adapter are connected by way of a modular cord which comes with the adapter The headset adapter plugs into the jack labeled Other None None To place a call using your headset 1 Touch On Quiet on the headset adapter The green light next to the button goes on 2 Dial the outside number To answer a call 1 Touch On Quiet on the headset adapter Accessory Equipm
169. elephone lines 2 4 o appear on buttons 2 9 S O number of administered 3 10 ___ o Outward Call Restriction assigning P Page All Sopi BIS IT paging oon 2 8 o O assigning removing E administration of paging group I e administration of 3 paging group e administration of 3 paging jack pin out specifications password See creation of 5 123 SS O using with RLA mode System Speed Dial Codes 2 20_ __ _ o O pause in Personal Speed Dial 5 in System Speed Dial Codes with Outside Auto Dial 5 105 S O with System Speed Dial 5 151 o O PBX 5 136 00 5 120 with recall 5 120 personal lines 5 56 5 107 5 108 5 111 5 167 Personal Speed Dial 5 109 5 109 code 5 3 maximum number of characters description of 5 3 with special characters 5 136 jack assigned to 3 43 _ oo O needed for reports with Call Report 5 43 S printout cancellation for System Feature Re port 5 147 privacy 5 113 5 168 5 I71 S on lines A and E 5 114 S private line AJB 38 o O line E program definition ofJ3 1 O Program Mode Lock 3 23 5 117 H 5 119 5 154 ___ programmable feature button above transfer button 3 25 lt programming erased See system reset programming the voice terminal 5 115 Q Quick Reference Guide Administration Codes ASA Features Programming Codes System Administration 3 37 3 47_ o sug
170. em Administration Administration Procedure Do This Designate a jack for the ASA features jack 18 is the initial assignment Assign an alternate attendant to handle ASA calls Select the lines except tie lines that you want to add to or remove from CF DXD RLA or SA line groups Enable or disable the voice message for all lines in your CF and or DXD incoming line groups Modify the voice message for one or more lines in your CF RLA SA and or DXD incoming line groups Enter administration mode Dial 59 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the jack you want to assign to ASA Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial 79 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the voice terminal you want to assign as the alternate attendant console Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial the appropriate code 51 for the CF incoming line group 52 for the CF outgoing line group 58 for the DXD incoming line group 54 for the RLA incoming line group 75 for SA incoming line group Touch line buttons until the green light next to it indicates its assignment to the list Green light on line is assigned to the list Green light off line is not assigned to the list Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration
171. em administration or you may decide not to use any of the ASA features and assign intercom number 18 to a voice terminal To find out more about the Automatic System Access features Call Forwarding Extension Dialing and Remote Line Access see the entries for them in Section 5 Reference Under Voice Terminals Do not write in a name next to intercom number 18 if you plan to use any of the Automatic System Access features unless you plan to assign an intercom number other than 18 to ASA during system administration Cross out ASA next to intercom number 18 if you do not plan to use any of the ASA features or you are assigning the ASA features to a different intercom number You can then treat intercom number 18 just like any other intercom number as you assign them If you are assigning the ASA features to a different intercom number write ASA next to the intercom number you plan to use instead of intercom number 18 Intercom Number 19 Notice on the form that BB and Reports appear in parentheses in the Name column next to intercom number 19 The Busy Buster feature automatically redials the last number you dialed up to 10 times and signals you if and when the line begins to ring Operation of the BB feature requires a dedicated voice terminal jack on the control unit At startup the system automatically reserves jack intercom number 19 for Busy Buster You can choos
172. em beeps twice to confirm the entry and to remind the administrator that he or she cannot dial any more characters If the administrator dials less than 16 characters the system does not beep The administrator should give a copy of the System Speed Dial code assignments to each person who will be using these codes People can dial the codes or program a button for specific Speed Dial codes If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information Before you administer the System Speed Dial feature refer to the System Speed Dial Form that you have filled out To assign System Speed Dial codes to frequently dialed telephone numbers 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial the code 60 through 89 or 900 through 999 that you are assigning to the telephone number MERLIN Pius System Features 5 151 3 Dial one of the following codes gt Dial 90 to assign the Speed Dial code without Restriction Override For example if you want the Speed Dial number to have the same restrictions as the actual telephone number that is call or toll restrictions still apply with this number dial the System Speed Dial code such as 67 or 936 90 and then the telephone number gt Dial 92 to assign the Speed Dial code with Restriction Override For example if you want to assign a System Speed Dial code to a telephone number that anyone in the system
173. ent 6 15 To mute the microphone 1 Hold down On Quiet on the headset adapter To hang Up 1 Touch Off on the headset adapter The green light next to On Quiet goes off 6 16 Accessory Equipment Loudspeaker Paging System DESCRIPTION If you have a compatible loudspeaker paging system you can connect it to the MERLIN Plus system either through the page jack on the control unit or through a CO outside line jack on a line module as shown in Figures 6 7 and 6 8 You can then page people make announcements and provide background music if available throughout the building FIGURE 6 8 Loudspeaker Paging System connected to the Page Jack on the MERLIN Plus system control unit MERLIN Plus control unit Power light Warning light Loudspeaker paging system es Oo m o m o o m g a Accessory Equipment 6 17 CONSIDERATIONS 6 18 Accessory Equipment FIGURE 6 9 Loudspeaker Paging System connected to a CO Line on a Line Module MERLIN Plus control unit OOOO Loudspeaker paging system OD O o o 0 oO O Considerations for the Page Jack connection The loudness of the loudspeaker paging system is controlled by the loudspeaker paging system only To cent ml the loudness of the background music throughout the building or to turn off the background music the system administrator can dial a code at the administrator attendant console for the preferred volu
174. eps twice Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode Systemwide Options 3 35 SYSTEM SPEED DIAL 3 36 Systemwide Options You can assign System Speed Dial codes to frequently called telephone numbers or to account numbers you want to appear on call reports if you have the Call Report option All system voice terminals will have access to these System Speed Dial codes Assigning Codes to Telephone Numbers As you learned when you planned your system you can store telephone numbers under System Speed Dial codes with or without Restriction override You can also specify which telephone numbers stored under codes will be printed out in full on call reports and which will be identified in the reports by System Speed Dial code only Your System Speed Dial Form should show which if any numbers you have designated for Restriction Override and which if any you have designated as private that is not to be printed on Call Reports To assign System Speed Dial codes 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial the code 60 through 89 or 900 through 999 that you are assigning to the telephone number 3 Dial one of the following codes gt If you did not put a check mark in the Restriction Override column dial 90 gt If you put a check mark in the Restriction Override column dial 92 4 Dial the telephone number If you checked the Pr
175. er feature to transfer the call to the voice terminal with that intercom number If the call goes unanswered at the destination voice terminal and there is an administered Transfer Return Interval the call is transferred to the administrator attendant or the alternate attendant console when the interval expires If the system is administered for no return of transferred calls the call continues to ring at the destination voice terminal until the caller hangs up If a compatible audio source is available Music On Hold is recommended for DXD so that the caller can hear music while waiting See Music On Hold under Accessory Equipment later in this section If the system is in both DXD and Remote Line Access modes and the lines overlap DXD takes precedence MERLIN Plus System Features 5 59 ADMINISTRATION If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information DXD Line Groups At startup none of the system s outside lines are assigned to each ASA line group You need to assign which lines you want to designate for DXD 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 58 for a DXD incoming line group 3 Touch the line buttons until the green lights show the makeup you want for the line group ine is assigned to the group ine is not assigned to the group Green light on l Green light off l 4 Touch Administer The console beep
176. er information on the attendant console see Section 4 Using the Attendant Console If you need help in using the Call P ickup the Ring Override or the Call Forwarding features see the entries Call Pickup Ring Override or Call Forwarding jin this section 5 102 MERLIN Plus System Features One Touch Dialing DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE In the MERLIN Plus system there are six features that allow you to dial or redial a telephone number with the touch of a button e Outside Auto Dial Dial an outside number by touching a button An Outside Auto Dial button can hold a maximum of 16 digits e Auto Intercom Dial an intercom number with one touch whenever you want to call someone connected to your MERLIN Plus system e System Speed Dial If your system administrator has assigned a System Speed Dial code 60 through 89 or 900 through 999 to a frequently dialed telephone number or account number you can program the speed dial code onto an available voice terminal button Then when you want to dial the telephone number or enter the account number on a call report just touch the System Speed Dial button for that number e Last Number Dial If you have programmed a Last Number button for your voice terminal you can redial with one touch the most recent number that you dialed Each time you want this feature to redial a number you
177. ercom button of the jack you want to assign to ASA The green light goes off next to the old Auto Intercom button and the green light goes on next to the newly assigned Auto Intercom button gt Dial the intercom number of jack you re assigning to ASA NOTE If you hear a denial tone the feature is on or the VSP port is active You can either wait or turn off the feature 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode 3 14 Basic Administration Changing the Busy Buster BB jack assignment NOTE If you are going to use the Call Report or System Feature Report option you can assign BB to the same jack as ASA by using the adapter provided with the optional data collector or memory module 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 35 The green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button of the jack assigned to BB 3 Perform one of the following procedures gt Touch the Auto Intercom button of the jack you want to assign to BB The green light goes off next to the old Auto Intercom button and the green light goes on next to the newly assigned Auto Intercom button gt Dial the intercom number of jack you re assigning to BB 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode Changing the Reports jack assignment for Call Report N
178. ered by the VSP and forwarded When in CF mode callers hear the message Your call is being forwarded Please hold You can modify this message to include the incoming phone number You have reached number Your call is being forwarded Please hold You can modify the message for all incoming CF lines or just for some of the incoming CF lines You can also turn off the message so that calls are forwarded immediately without notifying the caller Under Modify Message in the row for CF Write the incoming phone number if you want it added to the VSP message or write a 0 if you want to turn off the VSP message Direct Extension Dialing DXD This ASA feature allows incoming callers using Touch Tone phones to direct their calls to specific extensions Direct Extension Dialing can be assigned to one or more lines so that incoming calls are answered by the Voice Synthesis Processor VSP which prompts callers to dial the desired extension number In the DXD row under Line Assignments for ASA Features Write an I in the column of the line s where incoming calls are being directed to specific extensions The system is factory set to answer DXD calls after two rings You can change the number of rings from 0 to 9 If the number of rings is set to 0 the voice terminal will not ring and calls are answered immediately by the VSP Line Assignments Form 2 15 Under Ri
179. erface BTMI The BTMI is intended for on premises telephones and accessories You can connect to your MERLIN Plus system such accessories as auto dial modems facsimile machines credit phones and answering telephones You do not need to use a MERLIN Plus system voice terminal with these accessories e General Purpose Adapter GPA The GPA is intended for accessory equipment that you can connect to your MERLIN Plus system voice terminal such as manual dial modems auto dialers answering machines and cordless telephones e Auxiliary Jack AUX jack The AUX jack on the MERLIN Plus system control unit is primarily intended to let you share Line A and or E with the MERLIN Plus system You can connect such devices as data devices a facsimile machine or an answering machine to the AUX jack Once you have assigned lines to a basic telephone be sure to provide the person using the telephone with a list of the codes for the lines he or she has access to Basic telephones are able to receive ringing intercom calls but not intercom calls with voice announcement Therefore you must program the Voice Announcement Disable feature for the telephone In order to program Voice Announcement Disable Ringing Options or an Automatic Line Selection sequence for the basic telephone the system administrator can use the Centralized Programming feature on the administrator attendant console ADMINISTRATION If your responsibilities do not incl
180. erminal you can select one of three ringing options Immediate Ring People who have primary responsibility for answering calls or handling a particular line should have that line administered for immediate ring Delayed Ring People who are providing secondary coverage for a line should have that line assigned for delayed ring so that the line rings only after ringing first at the person s voice terminal who has primary responsibility for that line No Ring In places like office lobbies conference rooms and public places the no ring option may be appropriate In the Line columns to the right of each appropriate intercom number In the bottom row for every line that is being assigned to a voice terminal write an T if the line should ring immediately a D if it should ring only after ringing at another voice terminal first or an N if the line should not ring at this voice terminal Line Assignments Form 2 13 BUTTON FREE LINE OPERATION AUTOMATIC LINE SELECTION SEQUENCE LINE ASSIGNMENTS FOR ASA FEATURES 2 14 Line Assignments Form You can use this option to assign outside lines to a voice terminal without assigning them to specific line buttons This feature is useful for 5 Button and 10 Button voice terminals so that buttons are available for programmable features You can also select either the immediate ring or no ring option with Button Free Line Operation Immediate Ring Those
181. erminal to indicate that there is a message waiting 1 Touch Send Message 2 Touch an Auto Intercom button if you have one for the person or Dial the 3 character dial code opposite the person s intercom number as found on the following table O Send m im Message f Susan 15 ol If the intercom number is Dial this code If the intercom number is Dial this code Intercom 10 Intercom 11 Intercom 12 Intercom 13 Intercom 14 Intercom 15 Intercom 16 Intercom 17 Intercom 18 Intercom 19 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 Intercom 20 Intercom 21 Intercom 22 Intercom 23 Intercom 24 Intercom 25 Intercom 26 Intercom 27 Intercom 28 Intercom 29 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 For example if you want to turn on the Message light at Intercom 24 but do not have an Auto Intercom button for that person look for Intercom 24 on the table above Opposite Intercom 24 you will find the Send Message dial code 07 Then you would touch Send Message and dial 07 to send the message To turn off the message light repeat the steps C Send oD Message Handling Calls 4 7 SELECTING RINGING OPTIONS USING NIGHT SERVICE 4 8 Handling Calls You can program any outside line at your console to ring immediately to ring after a delay or not ring at all You will probably want most lines at your console to ring immediately the factory set co
182. ersonal Speed Dial code 23 is preprogrammed for Saved Number Dial and 24 is preprogrammed for Last Number Dial You can assign these Custom Calling features to different Personal Speed Dial codes using a slightly modified procedure Here s how to program Last Number Dial or Saved Number Dial onto Personal Speed Dial code 01 a Slide the T P switch to P b Dial 01 c Dial 90 d Dial 01 again e Dial 73 for Last Number Dial or 74 for Saved Number Dial f Slide the T P switch to the center position Dial 90 plus a telephone number or a PBX Centrex or Custom Calling feature code Follow the instructions above if you need to include a special character in the dialing sequence Slide the T P switch to the center position BEB aan gue T P SBR ean ana T P aa sen ages een San ase aan _ 01 24 90 tel no _ From a BIS 22 Voice Terminal If you are using a BIS 22 voice terminal use the following procedure to program a Personal Speed Dial sequence 1 5 110 MERLIN Plus System Features Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls Dial a Personal Speed Dial code 01 through 12 Dial 90 plus a telephone number or a PBX Centrex or Custom Calling feature code Follow the instructions above if you need to include a special character in the dialing sequence Slide the T P sw
183. ext to the Auto Intercom button that corresponds with the jack to which the data collector and printer are currently assigned Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the jack to which the data collector and the printer will be connected The green light next to hek button goes on 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position ae E a Bena Hs Administer Icom 19 spor ol f mi o o O Report 29 Te P o Administer O EE Minimum Call Duration HEHE o San EEEE To specify a minimum call duration other than 1 minute for call reporting 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 83 3 Dial one digit from 0 to 9 for the number of minutes For example to specify a minimum duration of 10 seconds dial 830 To specify a minimum duration of 9 minutes dial 839 NOTE Ten seconds is the shortest duration you can set under one minute 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position E i E 7 o Administer o i a Administer m MERLIN Plus System Features Type of Documented Calls To specify the type of calls that will be documented the system is set to have no calls reported 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administe
184. f you are unable to identify a problem perform the System Test found on the last page of this section before calling your equipment supplier for assistance Possible Cause 1 Faulty accessory connected to voice terminal Disconnect the accessory The trouble no longer occurs Do not reconnect the faulty from the malfunctioning accessory Contact your voice terminal equipment supplier to replace it The trouble still occurs Reconnect accessory and go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 System incorrectly set to Touch Tone or rotary pulse service Do This Check the instructions in The system is set to Touch Set the system to rotary Section 3 Administering Tone and you have rotary pulse Doing so may not the System to determine pulse service solve this particular problem but will allow you to move whether your system is set on to Possible Cause 3 for Touch Tone or rotary pulse service The system is set to rotary Set the system to Touch and you have Touch Tone Tone service The system is set correctly Go to Possible Cause 3 continued Troubleshooting Procedures 7 1 7 2 Troubleshooting Procedures Possible Cause 3 Call Restriction feature activated on malfunctioning voice terminal Do This Refer to Reference to learn how to administer the call Restriction feature Possible Cause 4 Outside Auto Dial Saved Number If The fea
185. f you do not have a line button for a call that you have received or that has been transferred to you you can still put it on hold using the Hold button However to retrieve the call you must use a dial code or program a Retrieve Call button To use this feature you can either program a button or use a dial code This feature is especially useful for 5 Button voice terminals that may not have line buttons for every incoming or transferred call If your system administrator has set your voice terminal for Button Free Line Operation you should have a Hold Retrieve button on your voice terminal so that you can put calls on hold and retrieve them later See None To program a Hold Retrieve button for your voice terminal 1 Label the button Retrieve Call 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 95 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position annu T P o Reiri aan T P etrieve ena Mm 5 oe L _ 95 _ You can use a programmed button or a dial code to access this feature To put a call on hold 1 Touch Hold MERLIN Plus System Features 5 85 You can use a programmed button or a dial code for the Hold Retrieve feature To use a Retrieve Call button to retrieve a held call 1 Touch Retrieve Call O Retrieve m D Call To
186. formation under the next three headings tells you how to do the following e Make button label sheets for the administrator attendant console e Enter administration mode e Leave administration mode Labeling Buttons The button label sheets on your administrator attendant console have to show how the functions of certain buttons change when you shift from the normal call handling mode to the administration mode Figure 3 2 shows you what the button labels should look like for a BIS 34D voice terminal with Display 3 3 shows the button labels for a BIS 22 voice terminal Administration Preview 3 7 To make button labels for the voice terminal you plan to use as your administrator attendant console do the following 1 Remove the blank button labels from the voice terminal according to the instructions that came with the voice terminal 2 Fill in the button labels with pencil or ballpoint pen since either can be erased if you make changes later gt For any BIS 34 and 34 button voice terminals follow the button labeling shown in gt For any BIS 22 voice terminal follow the button labeling shown in NOTE On the button labels divided by a horizontal line the term above the line identifies the button s function when the console is in the normal call handling mode The term below the line identifies the button s function in administration mode 3 Reinsert the labels following the instructions that came with the voice termin
187. g flowchart shows how the MERLIN Plus system processes outgoing calls For example if a call is dialed manually or with Personal Speed Dial the system first checks to see if the voice terminal is toll or outward call restricted If the voice terminal is unrestricted the number dialed is checked against the Disallowed List If the number is not on the Disallowed List the call goes through Call Restrictions Forms 2 21 FIGURE 2 3 MERLIN Plus System Processing Flowchart Number dialed System Speed Dial number Personal Speed Dial number Manually dialed number Does voice terminal have Restriction Override Is Is number outward or number on an Allowed toll restricted List Is number on the Disallowed Number will not go through List Number dialed 2 22 Call Restrictions Forms System Speed Dial Forms PRIVATE You can assign System Speed Dial codes to frequently called telephone numbers Then people in your business can call any of these telephone numbers by dialing its 3 or 4 character System Speed Dial code You can also assign these codes to account numbers that you want printed on Call Reports if your system has the Call Report also referred to as the Station Message Detail Recording SMDR feature People can then dial an account s code during a call to add the account number to the information on the Call Report You can store up to 130 telephone and or account numbers under System Speed Dial codes
188. g procedures gt Touch the Auto Intercom button of the voice terminal you are administering gt Dial the intercom number of the voice terminal you are administering 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode This concludes basic administration You can use your system now just as it is and leave further administration until later or you can go on and customize the outside telephone line assignments to individual voice terminals Basic Administration 3 23 Line Assignments for Voice Terminals As you filled out the Line Assignments Form you learned that customizing line assignments to voice terminals can help control costs and increase the efficiency of your communications system All the information you need to customize line assignments should be on the Line Assignments Form When you enter administration mode and touch the Auto Intercom button for a voice terminal the green lights next to the line buttons on the console show you which outside lines are currently assigned to that voice terminal Green light on line is resigned to the voice terminal Green light off line is not assigned to the voice terminal Your system comes from the factory configured so that all your outside lines appear on the same line buttons on every voice terminal These are the system s original line assignments A voice terminal retains its original line assignments unti
189. gested use 3 1 5 166 Voice Terminal Features R recall 5 120 5 137 5 166 __ S in Personal Speed Dial 5 109 O in System Speed Dial Codes 2 23 with Outside Auto Dial 5 105 o O with System Speed Dial 5 151 i O Receptionist Secretary Temppate description of 3 220 example reference Remote Line Access 5 121 45 125 See also RLA reset the system 3 47 3 SI _ o for Touch Tone Tiling restriction override42 19 3 36 3 51 5 65 150 assigning System Speed i ane ane marking on System Speed Dial Forms retrieve See pe ring override button 5 126 ringing intercom call 5 157_ o O line preference 5 127 _ __ O OO o options 4 8 5 107 5 128 L 45 129 5 168 5 171 J6 5 delayed ring 4 8 5 128 _ ooo immediate ieksa no ring 4 8 5 128 __ o O with Er msp administration of 3 10 0 need to administrate with Personal Speed Dial 5 109 _ S with Touch Tone Enable rotary telephones with BTMI2 6 8 o o Index l 5 S System Configuration Form Saved Number Dial 5 89 5 103 5 130 _ 5 131 5 167 5 171 description of 2 2 button 5 130 use for basic administration 2 9 Saved Number Redial using reformation from Screen calls 4 5 H 4 6 5 107 System Feature Report 5 142 5 147 6 9 Send Message 4 7 5 99 5 132 5 133 5 169 abort and cancel 3 43 sss dial code chart
190. gs every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 2 Touch Intercom 3 Dial one of the following codes to indicate that you want voice announcements allowed or prevented at your voice terminal gt If you want voice announcements allowed dial 38 The green light next to the Intercom button goes on gt If you want voice announcements prevented dial 39 The green light next to the Intercom button goes off 4 Slide the T P switch to the center position Intercom T HE if None MERLIN Plus System Features 5 163 Voice Terminal Templates DESCRIPTION During administration it may be useful to use the four voice terminal templates already designed for typical business uses rather than program each voice terminal individually The four templates are e The Clear Template This template is used for erasing previous voice terminal features so that new features can be assigned This template does not remove line assignments e The Dialer Template This template is for personnel who do not require special features and who aren t likely to make toll calls e The Feature Template This template is designed for personnel such as managers and owners who need unrestricted phone use along with several additional features offered by the MERLIN Plus system e The Receptionist Secretary Template This template is intended for receptionists secretaries
191. h three lines 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode GHOST LINES When you first turn on the system the control unit thinks there are the same number of outside lines in the system as there are line jacks on the control unit This causes the control unit to create ghost lines in a system that has fewer lines than line jacks Since ghost lines can interfere with some system features you should eliminate them using the procedure described above for designating the number of lines in the system DIAL SIGNALS Locate the column headed Dial Signals on the System Configuration Form Is the box next to Touch Tone checked If so you don t have to do anything here Your system is factory set to generate Touch Tones when you dial an outside call on any of your outside telephone lines But if the box next to Rotary Pulse is checked you have to set the system to generate rotary pulse signals when you dial outside calls Set the system for pulse dialing as follows 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 39 NOTE If you ever have to reset the system for Touch Tone dialing dial 38 instead of 39 in step 2 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Continue with administration or leave administration mode 3 10 Basic Administration LONG DISTANCE DIALING TRANSFER RETURN I
192. he T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Diala and a 2 digit code 01 through 08 that corresponds to the number of the list For example to add an entry to List 5 dial 05 3 Dial the 2 digit number of the item in the Allowed List between 01 and 10 For example to add an entry to List 3 as the first item on the list dial 03 01 4 Dial the number toll prefix and area code if necessary or exchange to be added to the list maximum eight digits For example to add the 201 area code with the toll prefix and 834 exchange to List 2 as the seventh item on the list dial 02 07 1 201 834 5 6 MERLIN Plus System Features 5 Touch Administer 6 The console beeps twice Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position ERE aun aus TeP o nan ann BEE n Esa ana ans D Administer D BREe aaa aun _ 01 08 01 10 are code J Te P J Administer O E _ To delete an entry from an Allowed List 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer Dial a and a 2 digit code 01 through 08 that corresponds to the number of the list Dial the 2 digit item number 01 through 10 of the entry you want to delete For example to delete the eighth entry of List 1 dial 01 08 Touch Drop Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position
193. he administrator attendant voice terminal and intercom numbers 18 and 19 are reserved for system features unless reassigned If you are using the ASA feature Direct Extension Dialing you can assign an alternate attendant to handle returning DXD calls that are busy misdialed or unanswered All other calls are directed to the main attendant For more information see Alternate Attendant in Section 5 Reference Under Voice Terminals Next to intercom numbers that areas yet unassigned write in the names and work locations of the people to be assigned voice terminals If assigning an alternate attendant to handle returning Direct Extension Dialing calls write Alt Attendant and the name of the person next to the appropriate intercom number Paging Groups The MERLIN Plus system lets you page the people in your business through the speakers on their voice terminals You don t need an external paging system for this feature System Configuration Form 2 7 PROGRAM MODE LOCK 2 8 System Configuration Form The system automatically assigns all voice terminals to a single paging group called the Page All Group You can t change the makeup of the Page All Group See the Group Page entry in Section 5 Reference for more information on the Page All feature The system also assigns intercoms 10 through 19 to Paging Group 1 and intercoms 20 through 29 to Paging Group 2 You can keep
194. he established restrictions See Allowed Lists If the administrator decides to store a System Speed Dial code with Restriction Override all voice terminals in the system can use the code as a type of password that allows the person to access the outside number regardless of toll or outward call restrictions previously placed on the voice terminal See System Speed Dial If there are two or more voice terminals in the system that will have the same restrictions the administrator can use the Copy feature to copy these restrictions from one voice terminal to another See When administering call restrictions the system administrator can use the Automatic Call Restriction Reset feature to ensure the integrity of the assigned restrictions See Automatic Call Restriction Reset in this section If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information To administer call restrictions to a voice terminal 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the voice terminal you want to restrict 3 Touch Restrict until the green light beside it shows the kind of call restriction you want the voice terminal to have Steady green light on Unrestricted all calls permitted Flashing green light Toll restricted local and intercom calls only Green light off Outward restricted
195. her voice Programmable Dial 85 or dial 85 an intercom terminal number Conference Have a telephone conference with Preassigned several people at one time Drop Disconnect a person from a conference Preassigned call Hands Free Answer on Answer intercom calls without lifting Preassigned Intercom HFAI handset on voice terminal with an HFAI button Hold Retrieve Return to a call on hold for people Programmable Dial 95 with button he operation Transfer Transfer a call to another voice Preassigned terminal Exclusive Hold Place a call on hold so that it can only Programmable Dial 77 You can also access this feature by using a dial code 5 166 Quick Reference Guide to MERLIN Plus Features Preassigned or Feature Name Description Programmable Programming Code CALL HANDLING REPORTS Account Number Entry Enter an account number on a Call Programmable Dial 82 Report SMDR by dialing the number or a System Speed Dial code Account Number Entry Enter an account number on a Programmable Dial 88 an account number up to 16 digits with one touch Call Report or Dial 95 a System Speed Dial code 60 through 89 or 900 through 999 QUICK DIALING Auto Intercom Dial an intercom number with one touch Programmable Dial 91 an intercom number A button with lights is recommended Last Number Dial Dial with one touch the number that you Programmable Dial 73 last dialed Outside Auto Dial Dial an o
196. ial 85 If previously administered the green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button for the jack to which the data collector and printer are currently assigned Touch the Auto Intercom button of the jack to which the data collector and printer are connected The green light goes off next to the Auto Intercom button for the old jack and the green light next to the Auto Intercom button for the new jack goes on Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the phone you want to program Touch Conference Program the telephone Touch Conference Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial 89 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the dial code of the voice terminal you are administering Green light on the voice terminal is locked Green light off the voice terminal is unlocked and can be programmed NOTE Touch CONFERENCE to enable program mode lock systemwide Touch DROP to disable program mode lock systemwide Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial 35 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the voice terminal jack to which you want the BB jack connected Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode continued 3 44 Quick Reference Guide to Syst
197. iew 4 1 FIGURE 4 1 The BIS 34D with display as attendant console Display Display contrast buttons control Display BIS 34D o Call appearance buttons ogo 8 m Test Program switch iini Feature buttons uo D Ji S E a A A E OU 8 Dial pad oO r Ringer volume control 0 3 T E a il Eg Ea p a i E lai Speakerphone volume control Message light Speakerphone light HFAI light Microphone light 4 2 Overview FIGURE 4 2 The BIS 22 voice terminal as attendant console Call Appearance Feature buttons Oooo o Qo x i ogo afal E TTL oj 0 aii j Test Program switch a i D D ABC DEF 2 3 GHI JKL MNO JJ XY 9 8 control hi l 3 6 Dial Inger volume o T j 7 8 oo if Oper 0 HFAI light Microphone light volume control Speakerphone Message light Speakerphone light Overview 4 3 Handling Calls TRANSFERRING CALLS 4 4 Handling Calls As the system attendant you will be answering most of the incoming calls To handle the calls efficiently you will find it helpful to know about the following features and procedures Transferring calls Using the Auto Intercom buttons for people in your system Paging through the voice terminal speakers Using the Send Message feature Changing the ringing opt
198. igure 3 2 shows a BIS 34D with display used as a console The line buttons above the dial pad and the Auto Intercom buttons to the right of the dial pad give you one touch access to each line and voice terminal The lights allow you to keep track of administration procedures as well as changes in the status of the voice terminals and the outside lines during normal call handling A BIS 22 voice terminal or a BIS 22D voice terminal is a good selection for an administrator attendant console if you have 10 voice terminals or less When using a BIS 22 voice terminal with more than 10 voice terminals on the system some features require that you enter the intercom numbers of the voice terminals that do not have Auto Intercom buttons at the console Also the following features are administered using a dial code see The BIS 22 Voice Terminal as an Administrator Console in this section instead of an intercom number e Change the makeup of paging groups See the FGroup Page lentry in Section 5 Reference for details e Assign Disallowed List systemwide or to selected voice terminals See the Disallowed Lists entry in Section 5 Reference for details e Assign Allowed Lists to restricted phones See the Allowed Lists entry in Section 5 Reference for details e Lock voice terminals so that individuals cannot reprogram them See the Program Mode Lock entry in Section 5 Reference for details
199. intercom calls only 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 48 MERLIN Plus System Features 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each voice terminal you want to restrict 6 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position T P g 0 g Administer Susan 15 Restrict ee f c F m f 5 o T P Administer m ELN a lt PROGRAMMING None HOW TO USE Ask your system administrator what call restrictions if any he or she has assigned to your voice terminal MERLIN Plus System Features 5 49 Centralized Programming DESCRIPTION The Centralized Programming feature allows the system administrator the convenience of programming features onto individual voice terminals directly from the administrator attendant console In this way there is no need to go to each voice terminal to do the programming This feature is useful when the administrator is assigning Ringing Options for incoming calls CONSIDERATIONS The system administrator must be certain that the appropriate feature buttons on the voice terminals are accurately labeled The voice terminal being programmed must be idle If the voice terminal is busy or in program mode the administrator hears a beep at the administrator attendant console indicating that he or she cannot use this feature until the voice terminal is idle again This feature cannot be used to program station 10 The system administrator can use the Progr
200. inue to follow this procedure for all other buttons you want to program 7 Slide the T P switch to the center position gag T eP O zan T P m g Beton Di sa ECE _ code _ 5 116 MERLIN Plus System Features Program Mode Lock DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION The system administrator may choose to disable or lock the programming function at an individual voice terminal so that the person at the voice terminal cannot change the programmed assignments When a voice terminal s T P switch is locked programming for that voice terminal can be done only at the administrator attendant console This feature can be administered for an individual voice terminal or for all voice terminals in the system except the administrator attendant console To program features onto a voice terminal the administrator can use the Centralized Programming or the Copy feature The T P switch allows a person to test the voice terminal lights and ringing of the voice terminal and program features on the voice terminal When the system administrator has locked the programming function at a particular voice terminal the person at the voice terminal can still slide the T P switch to both the Test and the Program positions and can use the Test option only However the person cannot change any programmed features at the voice terminal When your MERLIN Plus system comes from the factory programming can be
201. ion mode Enter administration mode Dial the code for the right list for lists 1 through 8 dial 01 through 08 Dial 00 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the appropriate intercom code number for the telephone Green light on list is assigned to the telephone Green light off list is not assigned to the telephone Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode continued Quick Reference Guide to System Administration 3 39 Administration Procedure Add an entry to the Disallowed List Remove an entry from the Disallowed List Copy line assignments call restrictions and programmed features from one telephone the source to another the target Change the Hold Disconnect Interval Assign a Disallowed List to a voice terminal Enter administration mode Dial 09 followed by the Disallowed List code 01 to 20 Dial the disallowed number up to 16 digits Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial 09 and the Disallowed List code 01 20 Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial 09 then 00 Touch the Auto Intercom or dial the appropriate intercom code number of the voice terminal you want to assign the list to Green light on list is assigned Green light off list is not assigned Touch Administer The console beeps twice
202. ion of usne initial Group Fagen ongoing Night oy administration mode send message with Direct Extension Dialing Auto Answer intercom 5 13H 5 14 5 17 __ Auto Answer All 5 11 H5 12 5 166 5 171_ _ turns on answering machine 5 166 Z 2220 O turns on facsimile machine turns on modem 5 166 __ O O with General Purpose AdapterJ6 13 6 14 Auto Intercom 5 15 using with Speaker Auto Intercom button and manual signaling J5 with transferJ 5 160 __ S need for Automatic Call Restriction Reset 5 17 ss with System Feature Report 5 142 0 c lt alerter jack Allowed List Form allowed lists 2 18 2 19 2 20 42 21 5 6 45 8 add an entry add to a voice terminal 3 48 __ S O administering assign to a voice terminal assigning capacity clearing all entries 5 7 o creating 2 21 o O entry form kinds of entries on 5 6 __ o Index l 1 Automatic Line Selection 5 18 5 168 7 hil ns 1 3 44 2 6 sequence 2 14 3 25 0 with Button Free line operation 5 28 ss with basic telephone with copy Automatic System Access 5 20 5 21 5 142 0 Call Forwarding 5 91 5 101 SS Direct Extension Dialing 5 91 _ S O on System Configuration Form Remote Line Access System Answer using with dial odie oo auxiliary jack 5 22 6 4 o auxiliary lines span aeeoo using basic T
203. ions of the outside lines on your console or helping others to change the ringing options for the lines on their voice terminals Using Night Service when you are off duty Activating System Answer when you are away from the Console for a short period of time or busy on other calls Using an alternate attendant position to handle returning ASA calls Using the headset Since an important part of your job may be to screen calls and then transfer them to the appropriate people you should be familiar with the following ways to transfer calls e Transferring Calls by Dialing the Intercom Number To transfer a call to someone by dialing his or her intercom number 1 Touch Transfer 2 Dial the person s intercom number 3 Hang up a amp e Transferring Calls with One Touch Transfer To transfer a call to someone using One Touch Transfer 1 With the call in progress touch the Auto Intercom button of the person to whom you want to transfer the call 2 When you hear a beep announce the call 3 Hang up F susan 15 B If the person has activated the Voice Announcement Disable feature or if the person is using the intercom line at his or her voice terminal you cannot announce the call because it will ring automatically e Screening Calls When you screen a call you first discuss the call with the person to whom it is to be transferred There are many reasons for consulting about the call For ex
204. iscard the malfunctioning cable center position Then Slide it to the center position Your voice terminal is faulty Unplug it from the modular jack and try another voice terminal in its place SYMPTOM A VOICE TERMINAL SPONTANEOUSLY PLACES CALLS SYMPTOM ALL VOICE TERMINAL LIGHTS ARE OUT WITH NO DIAL TONE Possible Cause Voice terminal is connected to the port that is administered for Busy Buster BB Check the control unit to see if the voice terminal is plugged into jack 18 BB default or the administered BB port The voice terminal should no longer spontaneously place calls Move the voice terminal to another port You need that jack for the Administer BB to a different voice terminal jack Possible Cause 1 Control unit is not receiving power Do This Set the control unit power switch to Off and then back to On Doing so resets the control unit Call your equipment supplier for assistance The green power light on the control unit is on and the trouble remains The problem was corrected when you reset the control unit The green power light is on and the trouble is gone The green power light is off Go to Possible Cause 2 The red warning light on the Go to Possible Cause 4 control unit is on Possible Cause 2 Switch controlled power outlet Make sure the control unit is not plugged into an outlet controlled by a wall switch Then The
205. istration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position Ls 3 o Auto 0 m Administer na 555 1234 E a F A f B o T P 555 9876 m z Administer D aean None The system administrator assigns lines to buttons for the whole system and for individual voice terminals Be sure that the lines that you have access to are labeled on your voice terminal MERLIN Plus System Features 5 57 Direct Extension Dialing DXD NOTE Direct Extension Dialing DXD is an ASA feature and therefore requires assignment of an ASA jack If the ASA jack assignment has not yet been made refer to Automatic System Access in this section before attempting to administer this feature DESCRIPTION When you put the system in DXD mode the control unit acts like an automated attendant Incoming calls on designated lines are connected to the Voice Synthesis Processor VSP for the following message prompt Please dial desired extension number When the caller dials the extension number the 2 digit intercom number the control unit transfers the call to that extension and the caller hears the following message Please hold You can also modify the voice message so that callers first hear the number they ve reached followed by the request for the extension number You have reached number Please dial desired extension number CONSIDERATIONS Direct Extension Dialing requires the following e
206. itch to the center position aaa aan T gt P Ban Sean T P Bea Ban E ones see EE 01 12 tel no _ HOW TO USE From a BIS 10 Voice Terminal To place a call using a Personal Speed Dial code 1 Touch Speakerphone or lift the handset 2 Dial a Personal Speed Dial code 01 through 24 3 If you programmed the special character STOP in a personal speed dial sequence after you hear the second dial tone dial the Personal Speed Dial code again to continue the dialing 4 If the line is busy touch Speakerphone or hang up to cancel the call g Speaker o phone Speaker 0 phone m From a BIS 22 Voice Terminal To place a call using a Personal Speed Dial code 1 Touch Speakerphone or lift the handset 2 Dial a Personal Speed Dial code 01 through 12 3 Ifyou programmed the special character STOP in a personal speed dial sequence after you hear the second dial tone dial the Personal Speed Dial code again to continue the dialing 4 Ifthe line is busy touch Speakerphone or hang up to cancel the call B os Speaker B Speaker 0 phone o nnn O phone m MERLIN Plus System Features 5 111 Personalized Ringing DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE To make it easy for the right person to pick up calls in a group office people in this type of office may want to program their voice terminals with a ringing
207. ivate column next to the number dial a before the telephone number NOTE Private numbers will not appear on Call Reports or on display voice terminals However private numbers will appear on System Feature Reports 5 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 6 Repeat steps 2 through 4 for each telephone number to which you are assigning a System Speed Dial code 7 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode Assigning Codes to Account Numbers An account number on a call report allows you to identify the person or organization to whom the call should be charged As you learned when you planned your system you can store account numbers in the system under System Speed Dial codes Your System Speed Dial Form should show the codes you plan to assign to your account numbers Then in step 3 of the above procedure enter the account number instead of the phone number Quick Reference Guide to System Administration The following table is a quick guide to administration procedures for the MERLIN Plus Communications System If you need more information on a procedure than the table gives you look up the procedure in Reference Administration Procedure Specify toll prefix or area code only Specify Touch Tone or rotary pulse Before you perform the steps given for any procedure you first have to enter administration mode as follows 1 Slide the T P switch on the left side of the console to P
208. l 38 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position T P g o T P uj g Administer o o Administer ol OB _ None If you have telephone lines that carry rotary signals you can switch to Touch Tone signals midway through a dialing sequence by using the Touch Tone Enable feature See Touch Tone Enable MERLIN Plus System Features 5 159 Transfer DESCRIPTION You can use your voice terminal Transfer button to transfer outside calls to someone else in your MERLIN Plus system There are three ways to transfer calls e Option A Simple Transfer You can ask the person to whom you are transferring the call if he or she wants to accept the call e Option B One Touch Transfer If you have an Auto Intercom button for the person to whom you want to transfer a call you can transfer a call with one touch e Option C Direct Transfer You can transfer a call directly by dialing the intercom number CONSIDERATIONS If no one answers the transferred call the call returns to the sender after a specified number of rings set by the system administrator The administrator may also choose to set the system not to return calls See Transfer Return interval If the person to whom you are transferring the call has activated the Voice Announcement Disable feature or if the person is using the intercom line at
209. l someone administers it differently If this is the first time anyone has administered your system all your voice terminals should have their original line assignments NOTE If you have not performed the procedure under the heading Outside Telephone Lines earlier in this section the green lights next to the line buttons on your administrator attendant console may show that your system has more outside lines than it really has If this is the case go back now to Basic Administration and enter the correct number of outside lines following the instructions under the heading Outside Telephone Lines MERLIN Plus system line administration offers two choices e You can keep the original line assignments on some or all of your voice terminals e You can customize the line assignments to some or all of your voice terminals to suit the needs of your business and voice terminal users ORIGINAL LINE On the Line Assignments Form find the voice terminals that are keeping their ASSIGNMENTS original line assignments then do the following 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 One after another touch the Auto Intercom buttons for each of these voice terminals The green lights next to the line buttons should show that all of your outside lines appear on each of these voice terminals If you discover that one or more lines do not appear on a voice terminal designated to keep th
210. le MERLIN Plus System Features 5 119 Recall DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE If you are on a PBX or Centrex system you can use the Recall feature when directions tell you to include a switchhook flash By touching the Recall button you will get one of the following e A new dial tone e Access to Custom calling services If you have PBX Centrex or Custom Calling features you must touch Recall any time instructions call for a switchhook flash By touching the Recall button you automatically place a specially timed pause onto the line If you press the switchhook instead you disconnect your call None None To use Recall as a switchhook flash 1 Touch Recall 5 120 MERLIN Plus System Features Remote Line Access RLA DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS NOTE Remote Line Access RLA is an ASA feature and therefore requires the assignment of the ASA jack If the ASA jack assignment has not yet been made refer to Automatic System Access in this section before attempting to administer this feature When the system is in RLA mode you can call in from outside for example from your home phone and use a password to gain access to one of the system s outside lines You can also use RLA to change the telephone number to which alls are being forwarded during CF operation For more information see Cc Call Forwarding earlier in this section In RLA
211. le features You can use the 24 buttons with two lights per button located to the right of the dial pad for programmable features 34 Button Deluxe The 34 Button SP 34 Voice Terminal with Speakerphone has a built in speakerphone that allows you to initiate and answer both outside and intercom calls without using the handset Above the dial pad are two columns of five buttons an Intercom button and nine additional buttons for outside lines and Auto Intercom buttons and programmable features The two columns of 12 buttons located to the right of the dial pad can be used for programmable features that do not require lights The 34 Button SP 34D Voice Terminal with Speakerphone and Display has all the features of the SP 34 voice terminal combined with a display in the top portion SP 34D 1 10 The MERLIN Plus Communications System Summary Voice terminal models BIS 34 and BIS 34D are ideal for the system administrator attendant console because their features allow you to easily use all the system s features You can also use the BIS 22 and the 34 Button Deluxe models as the console However the SP 34 SP 34D BIS 10 HFAI 10 10 Button and 5 Button voice terminals are not recommended for use as an adrninister attendant console because the administrator would be unable to see which buttons were being assigned special features during system administration In addition 10 and 22 Button voice terminals cannot be used to progr
212. line is not assigned to the voice terminal Green light off 4 To make the line Button Free dial one of these two codes gt Dial 31 if you want the voice terminal to ring The green light next to the Auto Intercom button flahes rapidly gt Dial 32 if you do not want the voice terminal to ring The green light next to the Auto Intercom button flashes slowly 5 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 6 Continue with administration or leave administration mode Line Assignments for Voice Terminals 3 27 LINE ASSIGNMENTS FOR The four Automatic System Access ASA features require the assignment of ASA FEATURES incoming lines and one requires the additional assignment of outgoing lines Call Forwarding CF If there is an I and an O entered under two lines in this row perform the following procedure to administer the incoming and outgoing call forwarding lines 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial the code for the type of line group you want to administer gt Dial 51 for a Call Forwarding incoming line group gt Dial 52 for a Call Forwarding outgoing line group 3 Touch the line buttons until the green lights show the assignments you want to each line group line is assigned to the group line is not assigned to the group Green light on Green light off 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Continue to administer the system or
213. ll voice terminals in the system from dialing the number touch Conference To remove all voice terminals from a disallowed number assignment touch Drop Green light on Disallowed List assigned Green light off Disallowed List not assigned If the intercom If the intercom number is Dial this code number is Dial this code Intercom 10 Intercom 20 Intercom 11 Intercom 21 Intercom 12 Intercom 22 Intercom 13 Intercom 23 Intercom 14 Intercom 24 Intercom 15 Intercom 25 Intercom 16 Intercom 26 Intercom 17 Intercom 27 Intercom 18 Intercom 28 Intercom 19 Intercom 29 Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position EEE T P o ane J an n uto EE jo ee aaa GE mercon O 0900 o T P E Administer o Em PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE To remove a number from a Disallowed List 1 Slide the T P switch to P and touch Administer 2 Dial 09 followed by the Disallowed List code 01 20 that you want to remove 3 Touch Administer 4 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position Te P mI rence None None f Administer o a 0901 0920 T P E Administer F E lt _ MERLIN Plus System Features 5 65 Display Unit DESCRIPTION Some 34 Button speakerphone voice terminals namely the BIS 34D and the 34 Button SP 34D v
214. ls to a specific number such as 555 5432 555 5432 Creating the Disallowed List Once you ve decided how many billable numbes you want to disallow you write each entry next to a separate item labeled 01 through 20 on the Disallowed List Entry Form located at the beginning of the Call Restrictions Form On the Disallowed List Entry Form List 09 Write billable numbers area codes etc in the Number column to create your Disallowed List Assigning the Disallowed List Now that you have created your Disallowed List you should decide to which voice terminals it is to be assigned when you administer the system Enter this information on the of the Call Restrictions Assignment Form In the Disallowed Lists column of the Call Restrictions Assignment Form Put a check mark next to the intercom number of each voice terminal to which the list is to be assigned when you administer the system UNRESTRICTED When your system is first installed all voice terminals are unrestricted that is there are no limitations on outgoing call traffic including long distance and local toll calls In the Unrestricted column on the Call Restrictions Assignment Form Put a check mark for each voice terminal that will not have either outward or toll restrictions TOLL RESTRICTED Some people in your business may need to be able to call any local telephone number but have little need to make long distance
215. m an Auto Answer Intercom button for your voice terminal 1 Label the button Auto Answer Intercom 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 70 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position O Auto ooh a o Intercom MERLIN Plus System Features 5 13 HOW TO USE To have your hands free unit turn on automatically when you receive intercom calls with voice announcement 1 Touch HFAI or Auto Answer Intercom The green light next to the button goes on o Auto Ans m J Intercom To return to answering calls yourself 1 Touch HFAI or Auto Answer Intercom again The green light next to the button goes off o Auto Ans D O Intercom 5 14 MERLIN Plus System Features Auto Intercom DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING You can use an Auto Intercom button for one touch dialing of intercom numbers Program any 2 digit intercom number onto an Auto Intercom button and use the button whenever you want to call the intercom number In the MERLIN Plus system you place an intercom call with a voice announcement Your co worker hears your voice through the voice terminal speaker and can respond to you without lifting the handset If the co worker does not have a BIS model voice terminal or HFAI enabled he or she cannot respond
216. me Background music volume can also be controlled at the music source The following are the jack pin out specifications for the loudspeaker paging system Pin numbers from left to right 1 through 8 are e 4 5 for voice e 3 6 for contact closure e 1 2 7 8 are unused ADMINISTRATION Considerations for CO line connection If the paging unit is connected to a CO port but is administered as a paging port it is treated differently than a CO line and has the following restrictions e An auxiliary jack cannot be used as a paging port e Conferencing to this paging port or adding this port to a conference call is prohibited e Transferring of the paging port is prohibited e Bridging onto the paging port is prohibited e No Call Reports can be generated for this line e No Call Restrictions apply therefore even outward restricted voice terminals could use this line for toll calls e The volume is controlled by the loudspeaker paging system only e Unlike the page jack connection the CO connection provides no signal to alert you when the loudspeaker paging system has been activated If you want to save available feature buttons for other features use the dial code instead of programming a Loudspeaker Page button If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information Administration for the Page Jack connection To set the volume of background music or to turn the music off dial one of the
217. me The music volume can also be controlled at the music source The Music on Hold feature is designed to accept 8 ohm impedance input matching the output of a variety of audio sources Accessory Equipment 6 21 ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE 6 22 Accessory Equipment You should use the Music on Hold feature with DXD so that callers can hear music when they are placed on hold See Direct Extension Dialing in this section You can also use the Music on Hold feature with System Answer so that callers hear a special prerecorded message or music while they are waiting If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information From the administrator attendant console you can set the volume for Music on Hold or turn it off by dialing one of the four settings listed below 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial one of the following codes to set the volume you prefer gt Dial 12 to turn off Music on Hold gt Dial 13 to set the volume to low gt Dial 14 to set the volume to medium gt Dial 15 to set the volume to high 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position If you want to set the volume on the background music for the building or turn the music off dial one of the following codes 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch
218. me person If you try to program both you deactivate the feature that you programmed earlier You can use either feature to place an intercom call See Auto Intercom None To program a Manual Signaling button for your voice terminal 1 Label the button Signal plus a name 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 6 plus an intercom number 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position BEB DEE T e P J E E BBB T P Signal aaa aan Mary o Et Et ELE araia 6 Icom no _ MERLIN Plus System Features 5 97 HOW TO USE To signal a co worker 1 Without lifting your handset touch a Manual Signaling button The signal is heard as long as you continue to touch the button To place an intercom call using a Manual Signaling button 1 Touch Intercom 2 Touch Speakerphone 3 Touch the Manual Signaling button for the person you want to call 4 If you hear a beep start talking or lift your handset to speak If you hear ringing the voice signaling path is busy and the voice terminal is being alerted with the intercom ring E Intercom m Speaker a Signal m phone m J Mary m 5 98 MERLIN Plus System Features Message DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE When th
219. mediately by the VSP Under Ring Interval in the RLA row Write the number of rings 0 9 before RLA calls are answered 2 16 Line Assignments Form System Answer SA System Answer can be used as an automated attendant to answer a call and provide a brief message before placing the caller on hold until someone is available to take the call System Answer can have up to eight incoming lines assigned to it In the SA row under Line Assignments for ASA Features Write an I in the column of the line s where incoming calls are being answered and placed on hold by System Answer The system is factory set to answer SA calls after two rings You can change the number of rings from 0 to 9 If the number of rings is set to 0 the voice terminal will not ring and calls will be forwarded immediately Under Ring Interval in the SA row on the Line Assignments for ASA Features form Write the number of rings 0 9 before CF calls are answered You can select one of four ways to have incoming SA calls answered You can choose the default voice message a shortened version of it or a longer version of it The default message says Please hold Your call will be handled momentarily The shorter message says Please hold The longer message says You have reached number Please hold Your call will be handled momentarily 5 You can also elect to hav
220. ministration mode touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the phone dial 34 touch Administer and leave administration mode continued 3 38 Quick Reference Guide to System Administration Administration Procedure Assign Call Restrictions to a telephone Add an entry to an Allowed List Remove an entry from an Allowed List Assign an Allowed List to a voice terminal A OQO N 6 a A OQ N o kh O N Do This Enter administration mode Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the phone Touch Restrict repeatedly until the green light indicates the desired restriction Green light on steady Unrestricted all calls permitted Green light flashing Toll restricted no long distance permitted Green light off Outward restricted no outside calls Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial the code for the right list for lists 1 through 8 dial 01 through 08 Dial the item number 01 through 10 Dial the entry up to eight digits The console beeps twice on the eighth digit Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial the code for the right list for lists 1 through 8 dial 01 through 08 Dial the item number 01 through 10 Touch Drop Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administrat
221. mode the Voice Synthesis Processor VSP prompts callers through the procedures for entering a password and gaining access to an outside line RLA operation requires the following At least one programmed button with red and green lights An incoming line group When you use an RLA button to activate RLA the system will treat as RLA calls only those calls that come in on lines specifically assigned to the RLA incoming line group At startup none of the outside lines are included in the RLA line group There are simple administration procedures for changing the makeup of the RLA line group NOTE Ifthe system is in both CF DXD and RLA modes and the lines overlap CF DXD takes precedence Passwords To gain access to one of the system s outside lines during RLA operation a caller must enter a valid 5 digit password when prompted to do so by the voice message The administration procedure that follows is for assigning passwords The first two digits of a password must be an intercom number in the system The remaining three digits can be any three digits Once the caller has gained access to the system the caller s identity is verified against the password including the intercom number and any restrictions that apply to the caller s voice terminal apply to the current call A synthesized voice message For RLA operation the voice message is a series of voice prompts automatically supplied by the VSP in the control unit You can
222. moving a voice terminal from a 1 Enter administration mode paging group 2 Dial the code for the paging group 71 or 72 paging group 3 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the appropriate code from the dial code chart for the phone you want to add or remove Green light on telephone is assigned Green light off telephone is removed NOTE Touch DROP to remove all voice terminals from a paging group 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode Set the Transfer Return Interval 1 Enter administration mode 2 Dial the code for the transfer return interval you want up to nine rings 2 plus the number of rings wanted 25 five rings 20 for transferred calls to not be returned 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Leave administration mode continued Quick Reference Guide to System Administration 3 41 Administration Procedure Set the Music on Hold volume Set the background music volume Set the date for Call Reports and System Feature Reports Set the time for Call Reports and System Feature Reports Enter administration mode Dial the code for the volume you want 12 to turn off Music on Hold 13 to set the volume to low 14 to set the volume to medium 15 to set the volume to high Or use the music source volume control instead Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial the co
223. must touch the programmed Last Number Dial button You do not need to do anything to save this number This feature automatically redials the number you dialed most recently up to ten times at 60 second intends If someone answers the call within this time your voice terminal alerts you To use this feature the system administrator must have assigned the feature to a voice terminal jack e Saved Number Dial If you have Saved Number buttons on your voice terminal you can save numbers for later redialing When you are ready to redial each of the telephone numbers merely touch the Saved Number button on which you have saved that number In order to use any one of these six One Touch Dialing features you must program it onto an available button on your voice terminal The system administrator can use the Program Mode Lock feature to prevent programming from individual voice terminals If this feature is enabled for your voice terminal you will not be able to program these buttons None If you want to use any of the six One Touch Dialing features you must program them onto your voice terminal For programming procedures for each of the features see their separate entries in this section When you want to use one of the six One Touch Dialing features merely touch the appropriate button MERLIN Plus System Features 5 103 On Hook Dialing DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE I
224. n Booklet for installation instructions The GPA connects to the Other jack on the telephone set The five button telephone set does not provide an Other jack and therefore will not support an answering machine If the Other jack is already in use for another purpose e g a modem an answering machine cannot also be used A station with an answering machine must have an Auto Answer button programmed When the Auto Answer feature is activated green LED is lit calls that ring at the station will also ring at the answering machine When the feature is not active calls will not ring at the answering machine Your MERLIN Plus telephone can only handle one call at a time If you are talking on the telephone and a second call comes through there will be a single abbreviated ring and the associated line button will flash but the answering machine will not pick up that call You may put the first caller on hold while you answer the second call or you may allow the second call to be returned to the receptionist MERLIN Attendant or transferring party Most answering machine features are available to work with MERLIN Plus but the following features may not operate inexactly the same manner Call Screening Most answering machines have a call screening feature that allows you to listen over a speaker when a caller is leaving a message This feature operates slightly differently when your answering machine is c
225. n next to the Auto Intercom button Green lights go on next to the buttons of any lines already assigned to the voice terminal 3 Touch the line button until the green light next to it shows the line assignment you want Green light on the line is assigned to the voice terminal Green light off the line is not assigned to the voice terminal 4 To make the line Button Free dial one of these two codes gt Dial 31 if you want the voice terminal to ring The green light next to the Auto intercom button flashes rapidly gt Dial 32 if you do not want the voice terminal to ring The green light next to the Auto Intercom button flashes slowly 5 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 6 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position aun ean C aaminister E E Susan 15 m E 555 1234 ae D T e e P Administer oo am To remove Button Free Line Operation by reassigning lines to separate buttons on a voice terminal 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Touch the Auto Intercom button for the voice terminal you are administering 3 Dial 34 A green light should go on next to the lines that have been assigned to the voice terminal 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position T P hd oe epee O B Administer Susan 15 m E fa g m o T P o
226. n you are finished press Exit 5 68 MERLIN Plus System Features e Setting the Alarm Alarm setting display screen ALARM Off 12 00 p g Alarm Alarm set for status 12 00 p m To set the alarm for example when you want a reminder that you have a meeting in five minutes a Press Set until the item you want to change flashes b Press Fwd or Rev to advance or reverse the time until the display shows the time you want the alarm to sound c When you are finished press Exit e Operating the Timer Timer display screen 12 03a 00 00 A Clock lt q Timer gt To operate the timer for calls you need to time a Press Time Timer to display timer b Press Timer Start to turn the timer to 00 00 and start it c When you are finished using the timer press Timer Stop When you want to return to the Clock Calendar display which shows the time day and date e Press Time Timer When you want to return to the call handling display e Press Time Timer MERLIN Plus System Features 5 69 Do Not Disturb DND DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING When you are busy and do not want to receive calls you can touch the Do Not Disturb button if you have programmed one onto your voice terminal When you receive outside calls the green light next to the line button flashes but your voice terminal does not ring Calls transferred to you return to the sender and intercom calls get
227. nd turn off the power for ten seconds then turn it back on The red lights go on and the green lights flash The console rings every 5 seconds 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position ana o gas ON o T e P 0 Administer ol San bee o Administer 5 Om 99198 t 5 148 MERLIN Plus System Features PROGRAMMING None HOW TO USE This feature is recommended for service personnel only MERLIN Plus System Features 5 149 System Speed Dial DESCRIPTION The administrator can store System Speed Dial codes for telephone numbers such as a warehouse number or a branch office number and account numbers that people in the office frequently use People can then dial the number simply by dialing the proper Speed Dial code Your MERLIN Plus system can store up to 130 System Speed Dial numbers System Speed Dial is particularly useful when the administrator wants to give users access to a specific number for instance an authorization code for an alternate long distance service but does not want to divulge the number For more information about assigning a System Speed Dial code to account numbers that the administrator wants to appear on call reports see Account Number Entry CONSIDERATIONS You can program a System Speed Dial code for an area code and an exchange Then when you want to dial a telephone
228. ndition but if you answer calls on a certain line only when someone else doesn t answer them program that line for delayed ringing You may want to program the lines at other people s voice terminals for no ring so that they are not interrupted while they work If you want someone in the office to answer calls when you are busy or not at your desk program the lines at that person s voice terminal for delayed ring The backup person may also want to program a Ring Override button for his or her voice terminal When the backup person must answer calls that would ordinarily ring at your console he or she can touch the Ring Override button and have all calls ring immediately at his or her voice terminal During the night or on weekends when you are off duty you can still make it convenient for someone else such as a guard to answer calls You do so with the Night Service feature There are three ways to provide Night Service for your office e You can provide the person with a voice terminal that has all the lines or the person can monitor the attendant console and answer calls there Be sure that all lines on which calls can come in after hours are set for immediate ring If the lines are not normally set for this ringing option the person can activate a Ring Override button that he or she has programmed for the voice terminal See Ring Override in Section 5 Reference e The backup person can also answer calls that
229. ne Request feature does not reserve a line Anyone in the MERLIN Plus system who has the line appearance can use the line when it is free None None To request an intercom or outside line that is presently busy 1 Touch the intercom or outside line button of the line you want to use The red light goes on next to the line button you requested 2 The MERLIN Plus system signals you with a beep when the line becomes free 555 1234 m MERLIN Plus System Features 5 93 Line Select DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE You may need to make an outside call at a time when you also need to leave your primary line open for incoming calls If your voice terminal has more than one outside line you can select a line other than your primary line for an outside call None None None To select a specific outside line 1 Touch the button for the specific outside line you want to use The red light goes on beside the line you select 2 Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset and dial E 555 1234 ol Speaker 5 94 MERLIN Plus System Features Loudspeaker Paging DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING NOTE This feature is used with an optional loudspeaker paging system and is compatible with paging systems with talkback Refer to under Accessories at the end of this section for more information If you have a Loudspeaker
230. ness hours and a bell off hours You may also alternate between two extra alert devices installed in different locations In addition an extra alert switch allows you to use two extra alert devices simultaneously However you may need a voice terminal power supply when you have more than one extra alert device connect to the SAA The extra alert switch is compatible with MERLIN Plus extra alert devices 48 V If you want the SAA to automatically turn on the extra alert devices connected to the extra alert switch plug the extra alert switch into the Alerter jack of the SAA Accessory Equipment 6 23 ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE 6 24 Accessory Equipment If you want to use extra alerting devices simultaneously you need to plug the modular cord for each device into a Line Bridging Adapter which you can connect to either position 1 or position 2 on the bottom of the extra alert switch For more information contact your equipment dealer None None To setup your SAA 1 Unplug the appropriate voice terminal from its modular wall jack and plug it into the jack labeled V T on your SAA 2 Plug one end of the modular cord into the jack labeled C U on the SAA and the other end into the voice terminal s modular wall jack 3 Plug the modular cord from the extra alert device into the jack labeled Alerter on the SAA To have the extra alert device turn on when a call rings at the appropriate voice terminal t
231. ng Intend in the DXD row Write the number of rings 0 9 before DXD calls are answered Callers on DXD incoming lines are prompted with the following message Please dial desired extension number Once the caller dials the two digit extension number which is the two digit intercom number the call is transferred to the extension and the caller hears the following message Please hold You can also modify the voice message so that callers first hear the number they ve reached followed by the request for the extension number You have reached number Please dial desired extension number Under Modify Message in the DXD row Write in the incoming phone number if you want it added to the VSP message Remote Line Access RLA This ASA feature allows you to call in from outside and use a password to gain access to one of the system s outside lines Remote Line Access can also be used from a remote location to change the call forwarding number This feature requires the assignment of at least one incoming line In the RLA row under Line Assignments for ASA Features Write an I in the column of the line s where incoming lines can be used for RLA The system is factory set to answer RLA calls after two rings You can change the number of rings from 0 to 9 If the number of rings is set to 0 the voice terminal will not ring and calls are answered im
232. ng when calls come in See Ringing Options Button Free Line Operation with the no ring option is appropriate for voice terminals in public places such as lobbies When anyone in your system uses the Button Free Line Operation feature e There are no red and green lights associated with lines to keep track of call handling features such as Transferor Hold e The person with Button Free Line Operation can answer transferred calls and ringing lines by picking up the handset e There is no way of knowing which line the system has selected for an outgoing call Therefore make sure that all lines assigned to these voice terminals are of the same type Do not mix regular lines WATS lines and Foreign Exchange lines e You cannot program an Automatic Line Selection sequence on voice terminals with Button Free Line Operation In this case only your system administrator can assign the sequence of lines for your voice terminal e You can use the Intercom Hold Transfer and Call Pickup features but you cannot use the Bridging or the Conference feature If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information To make lines on a voice terminal button free 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 5 28 MERLIN Plus System Features 2 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the voice terminal you are administering A green light goes o
233. ng your handset You can answer and speak to others on all calls without lifting your handset The system is in DXD mode Red light on next to the CF DXD button Green light on next to the Remote Line Access RLA button Green light on next to the System Answer SA button The system is in CF mode The system is in RLA mode The system is in SA mode MERLIN Plus System Features 5 91 CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE None None None None 5 92 MERLIN Plus System Features Line Request DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE If any or all the lines that appear on your voice terminal are busy you can still request the use of one of these intercom or outside lines When the line becomes available the system alerts you If two or more people request the same line the system places them in a queue according to the sequence in which the people requested the line When the line is free the system checks the queue and the first person who requested the line is alerted If the line is not used within 10 seconds after the voice terminal has received the alert the next voice terminal in the queue is alerted This process is repeated until the queue is empty If the voice terminal is idle the red light goes on next to the line that was requested If the voice terminal is busy the red light does not go on next to that line The Li
234. nments to remove ghost lines created by lines that do not have equipment connected to them Step 7 Unplug the voice terminal from the designated Automatic System Access ASA jack and plug the ASA cord into the jack instead The feature is programmed correctly and the feature still doesn t work The feature still doesn t work The feature still doesn t work The feature still doesn t work The feature still doesn t work The feature still doesn t work The feature still doesn t work Then Try the feature again If the problem persists go to Possible Cause 2 Go to Step 3 Go to Step 4 Go to Step 5 Go to Step 6 Go to Step 7 Go to Possible Cause 2 continued SYMPTOM VOICE TERMINAL LIGHTS FLASH WHEN AN AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ACCESS FEATURE IS ACTIVATED Possible Cause 2 Control unit or voice terminal may be defective Do This Step 1 Program the feature on a second voice terminal and try to use the feature Step 2 Replace the first voice terminal with a voice terminal known to be working correct y The feature works correctly The feature still doesn t work The trouble remains The trouble no longer occurs Then The trouble is either the voice terminal on which the feature did not work or the control unit To determine which go to Step 2 The problem is in the control unit Contact your equipment supplier for assis
235. nments 3 40 programmed features 3 40 _ __ oo O with 5 button voice terminal 5 54 ssi with customized line assignments 5 56 O cordless telephone with General Purpose Adapter 6 13 s s is sidY custom calling features 5 136 services 5 120 needed for printer Po Disallowed List 2 assign to voice a B33 SSS SSCCCC Y z Entry Form 2 31 using with dialcodesJ3 6 SCOC dzs disconnect a line from a conference call See Drop 5 52 display unit 5 66 5 69 __ o O Do Not Pu EENE ENEO EESIN EE AN IRE drop 5 drop ae TT wih conference 5 drop in Personal Speed Dialj 5 109 using with conference with Outside Auto Dial 5 105 with System Speed Dial 5 151 E emergency numbers error deny tone 5 Exclusive HoldJS5 171 J7 8 ______ o See Hold Exclusive 5 80 5 83 S extra alert device 4 8 6 23H 46 24 i O 6 23 o y extra alert switch 6 23 F facsimile machine 5 11 5 114 J6 4 6 7_ See also with Auto Answer ATJ 5 12 S with auxiliary lines 2 31 SS S O Line Assignments 2 1 2 9F 42 14J2 29 00 System coats T 2 1 2 27 00 description of Sg System Speed Dial 2 1 2 35 2 23 224 SSS Call Restrictions 2 1 2 18 H 2 22 _ _ G General Purpose Adapter 5 11 l6 4 16 13 H 6 14 ghost lines3 10 5 S6_ oo group listening with speaker 5 134 5 135 O o Group Page assign voice terminals to 3 50 Z Z o Z o o o o y
236. not modify or turn off the voice prompts for RLA Either RLA or CF DXD buttons must be activated To call in from a remote location the MERLIN Plus system must be set to RLA or CF DXD mode Therefore if you plan to use RLA during business off hours weekends evenings be sure either the RLA or CF DXD button is on before the office is closed MERLIN Plus System Features 5 121 Call Forwarding should be used only at night if your system has one or more MERLIN Attendants and you do not have dedicated lines for Call Forwarding To use Call Forwarding at night with the MERLIN Attendant activate this feature before leaving the office at the end of the business day and deactivate it as soon as your business day begins The Call Forwarding Remote Line Access Disconnect Timer should be used in conjunction with CF if your Central Office CO does not provide a forward disconnect signal to your MERLIN Plus system See Call Forwarding Remote Line Access Disconnect Timer in this section An outward restricted user can only dial numbers that are present in an allowed list ADMINISTRATION If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information RLA Line Groups At startup none of the system s outside lines are assigned to the RLA line group To use this feature you will need to assign line group s as follows 1 5 122 MERLIN Plus System Features Enter administration mode by sliding the T P
237. ns Forms e System Speed Dial Form If you haven t filled out any planning forms yet you should do so now It won t take long and it will save you time later Section 2 Planning the System contains copies of the forms and instructions for completing them When you ve completed the forms go on to Key System Components Read the following to get acquainted with the system s control unit and the administrator attendant console Control Unit The control unit is the vital core of the system It provides the power and intelligence for all voice terminals and it directs all incoming and outgoing call traffic All the system s memory including systemwide administration and voice terminal programming resides in the control unit Figure 3 1 shows the control unit with the front cover removed FIGURE 3 1 MERLIN Plus system Control Unit Top cover removed Power light Busy Buster jack Automatic System Warning light MOH jack Paging jack Access jack Top cover Control unit label On Off switch 3 2 Administration Preview Power and warning lights Line module Station module Administrator Attendant Console A BIS 34 voice terminal or a BIS 34D voice terminal with display both of which have lights for every outside line and voice terminal button are ideal administrator attendant consoles for MERLIN Plus systems with more than 10 voice terminals F
238. nstead of using your handset to listen while you place a call you may want to use your voice terminal s built in speaker When instructions in this guide tell you to lift your handset before dialing you may choose to leave your handset on hook and use the speaker instead If you have a Speakerphone button you can_use it when you dial a call so you can speak with people hands free See the Hands Free Answer on Intercom feature in this section for more information on speakerphone guidelines None None To use the speaker while you place a call 1 Without lifting your handset touch Speakerphone or Speaker 2 Dial the number 3 When you hear the other person answer begin your conversation Speaker o phone m If the line is busy or if you get no answer 1 Touch Speakerphone or Speaker to cancel the call Sj ker O Speaker D 5 104 MERLIN Plus System Features Outside Auto Dial DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION You can use Outside Auto Dial to dial frequently used numbers and codes with one touch These numbers and codes can include telephone numbers and PBX Centrex or Custom Calling feature codes You can include up to 16 numbers and special characters in an Outside Auto Dial sequence Any time instructions tell you to dial an outside number you can touch an Outside Auto Dial button instead if you have one programmed for the number you want to dial IMPORTANT If y
239. nt Number Entry The green light next to the button goes on 2 Dial the account number of the account to be charged for the call or Dial a System Speed Dial code 60 through 89 or 900 through 999 for the account number to which you want to charge the call 3 Touch Account Number Entry again The green light goes off f cct No O Ey m If you enter the account code incorrectly keep the call in progress and follow this procedure acct no O Acct No m o Entry 1 Touch Account Number Entry twice The green light goes off and back on again 2 Dial 3 Dial the account number correctly 4 Touch Account Number Entry again The green light goes off o Account o 0 Account o No Entry g No Entry To use a button for a specific account number D Account o Banu Baan 1 While you have a call in progress touch the programmed Account Number button for the particular account number to be recorded MERLIN Plus System Features 5 5 Allowed Lists DESCRIPTION When the system is installed people can use their voice terminals to place intercom local and toll calls However the system administrator can restrict any voice terminal to intercom or local calls See Call Restriction If restricted voice terminals require additional calling access the administrator can designate a list of numbers an Allowed List that people may call despite the established restrictions
240. number of rings between 0 and 9 before CF picks up the call NOTE If the number of rings is set to 0 the voice terminal will not ring and the calls will be forwarded immediately Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position PP T P O B m Administer m miee 0 Administer o m 7620 D r 7629 MERLIN Plus System Features 5 35 Passwords You and others in your business need at least one valid 5 digit password in order to change a call forwarding number from a remote location The first two numbers in the password are the caller s intercom number To create or invalidate a password follow this procedure 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 56 3 Perform the appropriate step below gt To create a password for a particular intercom number dial a MERLIN Plus system intercom number plus any three digits except 000 The console beeps twice gt To invalidate any password beginning with a particular intercom number dial the intercom number plus 000 Repeat the procedure for more passwords The console beeps twice 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position oun a Ht Teo P aan a Tce Un Bias ane Bus Administer 0 OBE ELI Administer ol aBB8 age o 4 ing Icom no _
241. o iel Speakerphone volume control Speakerphone light Message light HFAI light Microphone light Administration Preview 3 5 THE BIS 34 BIS 34D OR 34 BUTTON DELUXE VOICE TERMINAL USED AS AN ADMINISTRATOR CONSOLE THE BIS 22 OR BIS 22D VOICE TERMINAL USED AS AN ADMINISTRATOR CONSOLE 3 6 Administration Preview If you are using a BIS 34 BIS 34D or 34 Button deluxe voice terminal as the administrator attendant console you have the ideal arrangement for your MERLIN Plus system You can administer all the features including Disallowed and Allowed Lists Busy Buster and Group Page for all the voice terminals on your system by using the Auto Intercom buttons intercom numbers 10 through 29 The lights next to each button indicate the status of the voice terminal as you administer each feature The administrator console is automatically assigned the following features when you initially set up your MERLIN Plus system e Lines are assigned to 4 of the 10 buttons above the dial pad if the control unit has one line module e Lines are assigned to 8 of the 10 buttons above the dial pad if the control unit has two line modules e Auto Intercom buttons for intercom numbers 10 through 19 are assigned to the top 10 buttons in the first column of buttons to the right of the dial pad e Auto Intercom buttons for intercom numbers 20 through 29 are assigned to the top 10 buttons in the second column of
242. o connect to the outside line first you must flash the switchhook or press Recall to connect to the door If the phone is set to connect to the doorphone first you must dial 9 to access an outside line In either case the door may be opened by dialing the door open code The connection to the Doorphone Controller is ended by hanging up the phone General Purpose Adapter GPA With the General Purpose Adapter GPA you can connect to your voice DESCRIPTION terminal s Touch Tone not rotary equipment such as manual dial modems auto dialers answering machines and telephone extensions including cordless telephones See FIGURE 6 6 A modem PC and a voice terminal connected to a GPA back view dei Lt Auro TEL EQUIP GENERAL PURPOSE ADAPTER Modular cord Modular cord l Data device Modem Basic telephone or other Touch Tone device Voice terminal CONSIDERATIONS If you set the GPA to the Auto automatic setting you must program an Auto Answer All button for your voice terminal See Auto Answer All ADMINISTRATION None PROGRAMMING None Accessory Equipment 6 13 HOW TO USE 6 14 Accessory Equipment You can select the switch position labeled Join Basic or Auto on the adapter required for operating the telephone or data equipment When you have made the appropriate selection for your needs slide the three position option switch to the selected mode of operation For the Joined Call Operation option s
243. o keep private say a number containing a long distance access code you can give that number a System Speed Dial code and mark it for privacy when you enter it during system administration Then the system will print the System Speed Dial code instead of the telephone number on Call Reports as the last Call Report in shows See System Speed Dial later in this section The Call Report feature can only be invoked at the administrator attendant console When the system administrator administer the system for the Call Report feature he or she can set certain options for the feature e The administrator should set the initial time and date so that these details appear correctly on the call report e The system is set to have the data collector and the printer connected to voice terminal jack 19 for the Call Report feature However the administrator can administer the printer and connect it to any other voice terminal jack in the system except jack 10 NOTE If you are using the same printer and data collector for both the System Feature Report and the Call Report features and change the voice terminal jack assignment you must administer the new jack assignment for both features You cannot use the same jack that you used for ASA but ASA can share the same jack assigned to BB by using the adapter provided with the data collector ASA and BB jack assignments can be changed if necessary e The administrator can select the ty
244. o make and receive outside and intercom calls without lifting the handset There are two columns of five buttons above the dial pad and one column of 12 buttons to the right of the dial pad each with dual lights that indicate the current status of selected features and lines You can use the buttons above the dial pad for incoming lines auto intercom and programmable features You can also use the 12 buttons to the right of the dial pad for programmable features The display located in the top portion of the voice terminal offers a variety of visual aids for most features The BIS 34 Voice Terminal allows you to make and receive outside and intercom calls without lifting the handset There are two columns of five buttons above the dial pad for outside lines auto intercom and programmable features and two columns of 12 buttons to the right for programmable features The dual lights next to each button indicate the status of the selected features and lines BIS 34 1 8 The MERLIN Plus Communications System The BIS 34D Voice Terminal with Display allows you to make and receive outside and intercom calls without lifting the handset There are two columns of five buttons above the dial pad for incoming lines auto intercom and programmable features and two columns of 12 buttons to the right for programmable features The dual lights next to each button indicate the status of the selected features and lines The display located in the top p
245. ocal exchanges and perhaps emergency numbers such as 911 when you assign the call restrictions You can also use System Speed Dial codes called passwords in some telephone systems with Restriction Override to allow restricted voice terminals to call selected local or long distance telephone numbers You simply mark the numbers for Restriction Override and store them in the system s memory under Speed Dial codes when you administer the system Then anyone in your system including those with restricted voice terminals can use the Speed Dial codes to call the stored numbers On the Call Restrictions Assignment Form Put a check mark in the Outward Restricted column next to the intercom numbers for the voice terminals you want to place outward restrictions on when you administer the system When you assign an Allowed List of numbers to a voice terminal the person using the voice terminal can call the numbers on the list regardless of any call restriction placed on the voice terminal The system can store up to eight Allowed Lists of numbers with up to 10 entries in each list Each entry can have up to eight digits You might therefore want to create one or more Allowed Lists with entries such as the following e Local exchange codes A local exchange code is the first three digits in a 7 digit telephone number e Long distance area codes e Area codes plus local exchange codes e Emergency numbers with eight or fewer
246. ode by sliding the T P switch to the center position Baa T P RnB T P _ Ban OO B Administer m gan Administer ol _ 37 lt lt To change the system setting so that people must dial a toll prefix before an area code and a telephone number 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 36 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position gua ree fo see oo D Administer 0 Ban a Administer m EE 36 A None Ask your administrator whether you need to dial a toll prefix a 1 or a 0 before you dial an area code and a telephone number MERLIN Plus System Features 5 155 Tones DESCRIPTION Your MERLIN Plus system and your voice terminal provide the following tones to inform you of the progress of a call you are placing or are about to place There are also tones that let you know you are in administration or programming mode and a tone to tell you that your voice terminal is working satisfactorily Feedback Meaning of the Feedback Dial tone Steady tone You can begin dialing when you are ready Busy tone A slow pulsed tone The line is busy Voice signal You can announce the call through tone the other person s voice terminal speaker Dialing For Touch Tone lines a series of You have dialed another digit of feedback tones the telephone number
247. oice terminal with display are equipped with a display unit You can also purchase one separately and add it later to a 34 Button SP 34 voice terminal To order the Display Unit call the AT amp T National Sales Parts Center s tollfree number 1 800 222 PART and ask for order number 105400030 for black BIS 34 voice terminals The display provides information that helps you handle calls and program your voice terminal more easily For example when you dial a number or touch an Auto Intercom button or when you receive an intercom call or a returned transfer call the number associated with the call appears on the display screen When you are programming a button the display unit can help you check if the button has a feature already programmed onto it If you have not yet programmed a feature on the button the word blank appears on the display screen FIGURE 5 2 Operating Display Unit Timekeeping Features Timer Time Set Fwd Rev Exit Contrast Time keeping Display i m q _ features screen CONSIDERATIONS You can also use the display unit for providing an alarm timing calls that you place or receive and displaying the time day and the date See Figure 5 2 To adjust the clarity of the display screen characters turn the contrast thumbwheel until the numbers and letters are clear Only the numbers for incoming intercom calls are displayed on the screen the display unit does not show the identification
248. oice terminals e BIS 10 Voice Terminal e BIS 22 Voice Terminal e BIS 22D Voice Terminal with Display e BIS 34 Voice Terminal e BIS 34D Voice Terminal with Display e 5 Button Voice Terminal e 10 Button Voice Terminal e 10 Button Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI 10 Voice Terminal e 34 Button Voice Terminal e 34 Button SP 34 Voice Terminal with Speakerphone e 34 Button SP 34D Voice Terminal with Speakerphone and Display e 34 Button Deluxe Voice Terminal The MERLIN Plus Communications System 1 7 BIS 10 BIS 22 BIS 34 and BIS 34D Voice Terminals The BIS 10 Voice Terminal allows you to make and receive outside and intercom calls without lifting the handset There are two columns of five buttons above the dial pad for incoming lines auto intercom and programmable features The dual lights next to each button indicate the current status of selected features and lines The BIS 22 Voice Terminal allows you to make and receive outside and intercom calls without lifting the handset There are two columns of five buttons above the dial pad and one column of 12 buttons to the right of the dial pad each with dual lights that indicate the current status of selected features and lines You can use the buttons above the dial pad for incoming lines auto intercom and programmable features You can also use the 12 buttons to the right of the dial pad for programmable features The BIS 22D Voice Terminal with Display allows you t
249. ollowing procedures to add or remove a voice terminal from a paging group To administer the Group Page feature follow this procedure 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 71 for group 1 or 72 for group 2 A green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button if you have one of any voice terminal already assigned to that paging group 5 74 MERLIN Plus System Features 3 Perform the appropriate procedure If you want to clear all entries from group 1 or from group 2 1 gt Touch the appropriate Auto Intercom button s until the green light beside it shows the paging group assignment you prefer Green light on voice terminal is assigned to the group Green light off voice terminal is not assigned to the group gt Ifyou do not have an Auto Intercom button for the voice terminal you want to add or remove from the paging group dial a code from the chart below that corresponds with the voice terminal If the intercom number is Dial this code Intercom 10 Intercom 11 Intercom 12 Intercom 13 Intercom 14 Intercom 15 Intercom 16 Intercom 17 Intercom 18 Intercom 19 Touch Administer The console beeps twice Follow steps 2 through 4 for each paging group you want to administer If the intercom number is Intercom 20 Intercom 21 Intercom 22 Intercom 23 Intercom 24 Intercom 25 Intercom 26 Intercom 27 Intercom 28 Intercom 29 Dial
250. onclude the procedure The two beeps confirm allowable input Error Signal You will hear only one beep from the attendant console if you make one of the following errors e You enter an unrecognized star code e You enter a nonexistent intercom number e You enter one or more digits that are inconsistent with the administration procedure e You attempt to administer a voice terminal that is active on a call or in program mode e You attempt to assign an alternate attendant position with the System Answer feature on To recover from the error touch Administer and begin the procedure again Administration Preview 3 9 Basic Administration Basic administration should take no more than a few minutes All the information you need should be on the System Configuration Form OUTSIDE TELEPHONE This simple procedure tells the control unit how many outside telephone lines LINES your system has But it works only if your outside lines are plugged into an unbroken sequence of line jacks on the control unit beginning with line jack A The System Configuration Form shows the number of lines you have and the control unit line jack for each line under the heading Outside Telephone Lines gt To set the systemwide line assignments do the following 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 4 plus the number of outside lines in the system For example dial 43 for a system wit
251. onnected to a telephone in the MERLIN Plus system The General Purpose Adapter GPA that serves as the interface between the MERLIN Plus system and the answering machine masks the signal used by the answering machine to sense when the receiver has been lifted If you lift the receiver of your MERLIN Plus telephone to answer a screened call while your answering machine is still active you will be able to talk to the caller but the answering machine will continue to record the conversation If you cannot stop the answering machine by pressing the Stop button you should warn the caller that the call is being recorded ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE Toll Saver Most answering machines allow you to determine whether or not you have messages by dialing your telephone number from an outside telephone and counting the number of rings The answering machine will take longer usually four rings to answer the first call than to answer subsequent calls usually two rings This feature works with MERLIN Plus even though you may not be able to hear the ring under all conditions If you call on personal lines that bypass the MERLIN Attendant and the receptionist you will hear the ring If your call is transferred to your telephone by the MERLIN Attendant the receptionist or another telephone you will be on hold until your answering machine answers and you will not hear the ring Even if you are on hold and cannot hear
252. onnected to the MERLIN Plus system control unit and printer Busy Buster BB jack Automatic System Access ASA jack Jack 19 System default for the Data Collector SS ti G oY Go Wire manager Adapter as P Printer Data Collector Back view READY DATA COLLECTOR POWER C U PRINTER Accessory Equipment 6 9 CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE 6 10 Accessory Equipment An AT amp T 475 476 or 572 573 printer or its equivalent is recommended to work with the MERLIN Plus system data collector The MERLIN Plus system is set to have the data collector and the printer connected to voice terminal jack 19 but the administrator can connect the data collector and the printer to any other voice terminal jack in the system except jack 10 See NOTE If you are using the same printer and data collector for both the System Feature Report and the Call Report features and change the voice terminal jack assignment you must administer the new jack assignment for both features The data collector can hold up to one full page of printout 60 lines of 80 characters each The collector disregards any material over the one page limit For proper operation of the printer with the MERLIN Plus system data collector the printer options must be set correctly The options and the method of selecting them varies with different printers Consult the C
253. ons of any lines already assigned to the voice terminal 3 To add the personal line touch the line button associated with that line until the green light next to it goes on NOTE If another voice terminal in your system has that line you must remove it from that voice terminal by dialing the intercom number for that voice terminal and touching the line button that corresponds with that line so that green light next to it goes off 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position uae J J3 D E Administer Susan 45 555 1234 i Fo E el Ba o T e P Administer EE f O lt MERLIN Plus System Features 5 107 PROGRAMMING None HOW TO USE You can begin speaking when a call comes in on your personal line If you want your personal line to be the first line in your Automatic Line Selection sequence tell your system administrator when he or she administers that feature for your voice terminal See Automatic Line Selection 5 108 MERLIN Plus System Features Personal Speed Dial DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING If you don t have many available buttons on which to program Outside Auto Dial you can use the programming instructions below to assign a 3 character Personal Speed Dial code from 01 through 24 for BIS 10 models and from 01 through 12 for BIS 22 models to telephone numbers PBX Centrex
254. option number of the template Clear Template Dialer Template Feature Template l 2 3 4 Receptionist Secretary Template Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the source voice terminal s The console beeps twice after each voice terminal is administered a template Touch Administer The console beeps twice Label the target voice terminal buttons with the corresponding features as shown in and 8 7 NOTE Features previously administered on a voice terminal that do not appear on the template still apply such as Voice Announcement Enable Disable and Personalized Ring Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode Option 1 Clear Template This template is used to erase previously programmed features on a voice terminal so that new features can be assigned The Clear Template removes any features assigned to a voice terminal but does not erase line assignments see Figure 3 4 FIGURE 3 4 The Clear Template lt lt lt 34 Button ns moo 22 Button 10 Button 5 Button E Line D E Line H a J Line i Line G ll Line B E B Line F p Line A Ail Line E if OO Uv Oo UL UL Zi Co Co ii i i Intercom E i l Conference H Transfer E Drop a Hold g LL Jw 2 zZ o Es OC oc Oo Ce Co OC oo col co co oc oo co E 7 Basic Administration 3 19 O
255. or Custom Calling feature codes you frequently dial You can assign a Personal Speed Dial code to a sequence containing up to 16 numbers and special characters Personal Speed Dial uses a dialing code You do not place these codes on a voice terminal button None This feature is not associated with a voice terminal button Programming a Pause Stop or Switchhook Flash You may need to program a pause stop or switchhook flash into a Personal Speed Dial sequence or you may need to switch from rotary to Touch Tone signals in the middle of a programmed dialing sequence To do so you must enter one or more of the following special characters when you program the sequence For more information about using special characters in a dialing sequence see Special Characters in Dialing Sequences e To program a pause touch Hold e To program a stop touch Drop To program a switchhook flash at the beginning of a number touch Recall and then touch Hold e To program Touch Tone Enable into a dialing sequence touch Transfer MERLIN Plus System Features 5 109 From a BIS 10 Voice Terminal If you are using a BIS 10 voice terminal use the following procedure to program a Personal Speed Dial sequence 1 4 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls Dial a Personal Speed Dial code 01 through 24 NOTE P
256. order to use the feature with the MERLIN Plus system If your PBX Centrex or Custom Calling feature instructions tell you to use a stop touch Drop instead and for a switchhook flash touch Recall instead MERLIN Plus System Features 5 137 System Answer SA DESCRIPTION NOTE System Answer is an ASA feature and therefore requires the assignment of the ASA jack If the ASA jack assignment has not yet been made refer to Automatic System Access in this section before attempting to administer this feature When a call comes in you can set the System Answer SA feature to automatically answer the call and place it on hold or provide a brief message in this section you have the option of playing a pre recorded message about your business hours of operation special promotions numbers to call etc or allowing callers to hear music once the call is placed on hold To answer the held call touch the line button before placing the call on hold If a compatible audio source tape player radio or stereo is plugged into the Music On Hold jack see Music On Hold under CONSIDERATIONS This feature can be activated only at the position assigned to the attendant This will be intercom 10 unless an Alternate Attendant position has been assigned System Answer must be deactivated green light off whenever you reassign the attendant position This feature can also be activated while a call is ringing That call will
257. ort incoming calls account codes can be entered only for outgoing calls There is a maximum of 16 characters available for an Account Number Entry The system beeps twice if the administrator attempts to enter more than 16 characters If the administrator dials fewer than 16 characters the system does not beep The system administrator should give a copy of the System Speed Dial code assignments to each person in the system who will use those codes MERLIN Plus System Features 5 3 ADMINISTRATION If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information Before you assign a System Speed Dial code 60 through 89 or 900 through 999 to a specific account number refer to the System Speed Dial Form that you have filled out To administer Account Number Entry codes 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial the System Speed Dial code 60 to 89 or 900 through 999 that you are assigning to the account number Make certain that you have not already assigned a telephone number to that speed dial code unless you are making a change 3 Dial 88 4 Dial the account number You can also use a client s telephone number as an account number For that purpose dial 88 and then dial the telephone number 5 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 6 Repeat steps 2 through 5 for each account number or telephone number to which you are assigning a Sy
258. ortion of the voice terminal offers a variety of visual aids for most features BIS 34D 5 Button Voice Terminal The 5 button voice terminal has one column of five buttons an Intercom button and four additional buttons above the dial pad that you can use for outside lines and or programmable features 5 Button 10 Button Voice Terminals The 0 Button Voice Terminal has two columns of five buttons an Intercom button and nine additional buttons above the dial pad for outside lines and programmable features 10 Button The 0 Button HFAI 10 Voice Terminal has a built in speaker that allows you to answer intercom calls without lifting the handset It also has two columns of five buttons an Intercom button and nine additional buttons above the dial pad for outside lines and programmable features HFAI 10 The MERLIN Plus Communications System 1 9 34 Button Voice Terminal The 34 Button Voice Terminal is a basic voice terminal that provides two columns of five buttons above the dial pad for outside lines and programmable features The two columns of 12 buttons to the right of the dial pad can be used for Auto Intercom buttons and other programmable features that do not require lights 34 Button The 34 Button Deluxe Voice Terminal has two columns of five buttons located above the dial pad and two columns of 12 buttons to the right of the dial pad You can use the buttons above the dial pad for lines and programmab
259. ou want to program an outside auto dial button for an emergency number such as the police or fire department the FCC requires that you test the button to be sure you programmed it properly only during off peak hours You may need to program a pause stop or switchhook flash into an Outside Auto Dial sequence or you may need to switch from rotary to Touch Tone signals in the middle of a programmed dialing sequence To do so you must enter one or more of the following special characters when you program the sequence For more information about using special characters in a dialing sequence see Special Characters in Dialing Sequences e To program a pause touch Hold e To program a stop touch Drop To program a switchhook flash at the beginning of a number touch Recall and then touch Hold e To program Touch Tone Enable touch Transfer Your MERLIN Plus system may work behind a PBX or a Centrex system or you may want to use Custom Calling features If so use the PBX Centrex or Customer Calling features exactly as their instructions describe However there are two important exceptions e Any PBX Centrex or Custom Calling feature code that begins with a must be preceded by another in order to operate in the MERLIN Plus system For example if PBX Centrex or Custom Calling instructions tell you to dial 1234 you must dial 1234 in order to use the feature NOTE If you will be doing this frequently
260. ouch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial 50 Touch the line button s for the line s on which you want to modify the message Dial the telephone number you want to include in the message Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial 53 Dial the new CF destination telephone number Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial 68 Dial the desired value must be 3 digits Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode continued 3 46 Quick Reference Guide to System Administration Administration Procedure Reset the system Select a message to be played with System Answer Select number of rings before a call is picked up by an ASA feature Assign a template to a voice terminal Do This WARNING This procedure erases all system administration and telephone programming returns the system to its factory settings and restores initial feature assignments to the phones Use this feature only when you want to change the system radically Enter administration mode Dial 99198 The console beeps twice Turn the power off wait 10 seconds and then turn it on again Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial 77 followed by the desired option 0 no voice message
261. p Calls coming in on lines not in the DXD incoming line group arc not answered by the DXD feature At startup no lines are assigned to the DXD incoming line group There s a simple procedure discussed under Administration for changing the makeup of the DXD incoming line group CF and DXD are mutually exclusive modes the system cannot be in both modes at the same time Direct Extension Dialing cannot be used with the MERLIN Attendant There can be more than one CF DXD button in the system but there can be only one CF DXD button on a voice terminal If two or more users have a CF DXD button programmed on their voice terminals each of them can turn the features on and off For example if one of these users activates the Direct Extension Dialing feature the green light goes on next to the CF DXD buttons on all the voice terminals that have a button for the feature When the person deactivates the feature by touching the CF DXD button the light goes off next to the button at all the voice terminals that have programmed the CF DXD features You should consider having a Transfer Return Interval if you plan to use DXD See F Transfer Retum Interval Depending on the incoming call traffic you may also want to designate an alternate attendant position to handle all returning ASA calls See Aliemate Attendant When a caller responds to the voice prompt by entering an intercom number the control unit uses the system s transf
262. pe of calls that appear on the call report The system is factory set to have no calls reported However the administrator can set the system for reporting outgoing and incoming calls or for reporting only outgoing calls e The system is set to record outgoing calls that last at least 1 minute However the system administrator can change that setting for a longer up to 9 minutes or shorter as little as 10 seconds minimum duration e The administrator can also specify which System Speed Dial codes are printed on call reports and which ones will be private The entries on a call report are preceded by a C 5 44 MERLIN Plus System Features ADMINISTRATION If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information Before you administer the Call Reports options for your system refer to the System Configuration Form that you have filled out To administer the various Call Reports options for your system The Date and the Time To set today s date 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer Dial 80 Dial two digits for the month 01 through 12 Dial two digits for the day 01 through 31 a fF WO N Dial two digits for the year 00 through 99 For example if the date is March 24 1988 dial 80032488 6 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 7 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position
263. people with primary responsibility for answering calls coming in on a shared line should have that line administered for immediate ring No Ring For voice terminals located in public places such as lobbies and conference rooms so they do not ring for outside calls In the bottom row for ringing options of each appropriate intercom number Circle the T or N if the line will be Button Free assigned to the voice terminal but not to a specific line button When you touch Speakerphone or lift the voice terminal handset to make an outside call the system automatically scans the outside telephone lines in the order in which they appear on your voice terminal s line buttons until it finds a free line for your call For example if your voice terminal has the original line assignments the system gives you Line A if it s free when you touch Speakerphone or lift the handset If Line A is busy the system tries Line B and so on in alphabetical order until it finds a free line for your call Likewise if your voice terminal has customized line assignments the system will search for a free line following the customized sequence In most cases you probably want a voice terminal s automatic line selection sequence to be the same as the sequence in which the lines appear on the voice terminal s line buttons If however you want a special automatic line selection sequence for a voice terminal you can program that sequence
264. people within a particular department who need the same line assignments as each other but different from line assignments of people in other departments The administrator can also assign personal lines so that no one else in the system has access to them See Personal Lines If a person in a system with Customized Line Assignments does not have a particular line assigned to his or her voice terminal he or she can pick up a ringing call on that line by using the Call Pickup feature See Call If two or more voice terminals in the system will have the same line assignments the administrator can use the Copy feature to copy the line assignments from one voice terminal to another See A line jack with nothing plugged into it is called a nonequipped line appearance or ghost line To eliminate ghost lines the administrator must specify how many lines the system contains by using the administration procedure below If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information Specifying the Number of Lines in Your System When the administrator first sets up the system he or she must specify the number of lines in the system 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 4 3 Dial a number 1 through 8 that corresponds with the number of lines in your MERLIN Plus system For example if the system contains six lines the administrator dials
265. ption 2 Dialer Template This template is for personnel who do not require special features and who are likely to have no need to make toll calls This template can be assigned to even the smallest voice terminals including the 5 button voice terminals See Figure 3 5 for button assignments FIGURE 3 5 The Dialer Template 34 Button OF 22 Button 10 Button Line D ie Line H fa fil el Line c i Line G a a Line B a Line F rij Line E g BB OO i OO DI DD i UW OO m j E Line A Ub OO 0 Oo OO Co CU OU ji Intercom Conference E Transfer E Drop a Hold fl Ji Jil ool ool oo a gt za o 2 T jji UU rm z o i E 3 20 Basic Administration Option 3 Feature Template This template is designed for managers owners and personnel who need unrestricted phone use along with several additional features This template is for 22 button or larger voice terminals See Figure 3 6 for button assignments FIGURE 3 6 The Feature Template r 34 Button il rT 22 Button YX i 10 Button Q DoN Q Line D Line H o Not ROVRD g K g U Disturb m Line C Line G Q Privacy m Q Line B i Line F E Line A ld Line E a Intercom Hi BB E Conference H Transfer E Drop p Hold g OL OD OU OU OU OL OO oo D i i m DO 7 ea D U OU J J UW
266. r 2 Dial 84 3 Dial a number code 0 through 2 to specify the kind of calls to be reported the system is factory set so that no calls are reported gt If you do not want any calls reported dial 0 gt If you want only outgoing calls reported dial 1 gt If you want outgoing and incoming calls reported dial 2 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position aan i ToP 0 ann sas g T P OO B Administer o a b k m g Administer o EE _ o 84 0 2 PROGRAMMING None HOW TO USE None MERLIN Plus System Features 5 47 Call Restriction DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION When the system is first installed people can use their voice terminals to place intercom local and toll calls However the system administrator can assign either of two types of call restrictions for selected voice terminals e Outward Call Restriction restricts voice terminals so that only intercom calls can be placed e Toll Call Restriction restricts voice terminals so that only intercom and local calls can be placed Even if a voice terminal has Outward Call Restriction the person can bridge onto calls in progress answer incoming calls and place and receive intercom calls If the outward call restrictions arc too limiting the administrator can designate a list of numbers that individuals may call beyond t
267. r Voice Terminal Templates for further information MERLIN Plus System Features 5 165 Quick Reference Guide to MERLIN Plus Features The table below lists the preassigned and programmable features available from your MERLIN Plus system voice terminal Those features that can also be accessed by using a dial code are identified with a Each feature is listed by function followed by a brief description For more information read the individual feature descriptions in this section Preassigned or be picked up by the same voice terminal Requires a button with lights Feature Name Description Programmable Programming Code PLACING CALLS Line Request Request the use of a busy line Preassigned Line Select Select a line other than the line the Preassigned system automatically selects for you Touch Tone Enable Change from rotary to Touch Tone Programmable Dial 76 signals during a dialing sequence ANSWERING CALLS Auto Answer All Have optional equipment such as a Programmable Dial 75 modem answering machine or facsimile machine turn on when a call comes in Recall Disconnect a call without hanging up Preassigned Ringing Line Preference Lift the handset and instantly be Preassigned connected to the ringing line Voice Terminal and Know by the ring or by an Preassigned System Tones announcement the kind of call that is coming in CALL HANDLING Call Pickup Pick up a ringing call at anot
268. r part of the building the attendant can connect his or her console and an extra alert device to a Supplemental Alert Adapter see Supplemental ister Adapter a a a a o that each time a call comes in an extra alert device sounds e You can also choose to administer and activate the Call Forwarding feature for after hours use see Call Forwarding in this section When the system is in Call Forwarding mode you can administer incoming calls on designated lines so that they are connected to a Voice Synthesis Processor VSP in the control unit The VSP message informs the caller that the call will be forwarded While the caller is listening to the message the control unit calls the telephone number to which calls are being forwarded and uses the system s Conference feature to connect the incoming call to the outgoing call Call Forwarding can be used in conjunction with a MERLIN Attendant for enhanced Night Service coverage When used with the MERLIN Attendant however Call Forwarding functions somewhat differently See the MERLIN Plus MERLIN Attendant User s Guide for more information on this feature The system administrator must decide who will answer calls that come in after hours and how those calls will be answered For programming procedures for Call Pickup and Forwarding features rwarding features see the individual entries for these features in this section MERLIN Plus System Features 5 101 HOW TO USE For furth
269. rcom Call Outside Call You can program your voice terminal with a ringing pattern that is different from the ringing sound of nearby voice terminals See Personalized Ringing None None By listening to the tones that the system or your voice terminal gives you you can use your MERLIN Plus system more efficiently MERLIN Plus System Features 5 157 Touch Tone Enable DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE NOTE This feature is for rotary lines only If you have telephone lines that carry rotary signals use the Touch Tone Enable feature to switch to Touch Tone signals midway through a dialing sequence This lets you take advantage of bank by phone credit card authorization computer access and alternate long distance services When you hang up your handset after using this feature on a call your system returns to rotary signals None To program a Touch Tone Enable button for your voice terminal 1 Label the button Touch Tone Enable 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 76 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position gn T P o ann T eP Touch aanu o Tone Enbl m Bae _ _ 76 _ To switch from rotary pulse to Touch Tone signals as you dial a number 1
270. rds of its telephone traffic patterns and identify abuses in voice terminal privileges If an account code is entered when the call is made the call report prints that information for you Account codes are helpful in billing customers and different departments of the company for telephone calls that should be charged to them See Account Number Entry The data collector and the printer can also print a System Feature Report a list of the features that have been administered to the system see System Feature Report Figure 5 1 shows a printout that contains several typical Call Reports Each line beginning with C represents an individual Call Report FIGURE 5 1 A Printout of Typical Call Reports DATE TI ME CALLED NUMBER DURATION LN ACCOUNT 9090334 32145677 7879096565 110869685679714 4697896 IN 8889914321 IN 110869685679714 4697896 67 63354324 63354324 Ow wu Fw FED g Cc C C C C C C C Notes 1 Column headings DATE TIME etc do not appear on Call Report printouts 2 An IN in the Called Number column indicates an incoming call 3 A at the end of a number in the Called Number column indicates that the number called had more than the 15 reported digits MERLIN Plus System Features 5 43 CONSIDERATIONS As you can see from the reports in Figure 5 1 the system prints the number of each outgoing call If there s a telephone number you d like t
271. re and in a few minutes you ll hear the familiar sound of a dial tone enabling you to make and receive calls so that your business can continue uninterrupted while the rest of the system is being planned 1 Connect the system to a grounded ac power outlet 2 Connect the system to the Central Office line in jack A 3 Plug a voice terminal into Intercom 10 4 Turn on the system power switch You now can make unrestricted calls on Touch Tone lines only from the voice terminal Quick Start Procedure 1 3 What s in This SECTION 1 INTRODUCTION SECTION 2 PLANNING THE SYSTEM SECTION 3 ADMINISTERING THE SYSTEM SECTION 4 USING THE ATTENDANT CONSOLE SECTION 5 REFERENCE SECTION 6 ACCESSORY EQUIPMENT SECTION 7 TROUBLESHOOTING THE SYSTEM SECTION 8 INSTALLATION 1 4 What s in This Manual Manual You ll find the information in this MERLIN Plus Communications System manual conveniently divided into eight sections as described below You ll also find ten copies of the MERLIN Plus System User s Guide enclosed This section tells you what s in this manual and how to use it It also offers a brief introduction to the system s control unit and the voice terminals telephones Use the information in this section to make some key decisions about how you want the system to operate This section includes planning forms to record your decisions If someone else will be system administrator have that per
272. rminal in an area with low background noise Room acoustics and background noise may affect the proper operation of your voice terminal s speakerphone High background noise is caused by loud voices and loud electronic devices radios typewrite etc Keep the area near the microphone free of books and papers Let one person talk at a time When both parties speak at the same time transmission can be broken Always face your terminal when talking Place your voice terminal at least six inches away from the edge of the desk or table upon which it rests NOTE If you are having difficulty hearing the other person increase the speaker s volume level Refer to CIB 3078 Adjusting the Volume Control Switch on Your Voice Terminal for further information Certain conditions may cause difficulty with the speakerphone to persist If raising the volume level on the speaker does not help see NOTE above lift the handset to continue the conversation If you use the Voice Announcement Disable feature on a voice terminal with HFAI you deactivate the HFAI feature ADMINISTRATION None PROGRAMMING None 5 78 MERLIN Plus System Features HOW TO USE If you have a HFAI button on your voice terminal and you want your intercom calls answered automatically 1 Touch HFAI or touch HFAI Mic The green light flahes on BIS 10 and 10 Button HFAI models when active on a call and remains steady on all other BIS models g pin fo
273. rompting you through the procedure 2 Respond appropriately to the VSP prompts until you hear normal call progress tones such as ringing or the busy signal 3 Complete your call Gaining aceess tay BEA line group irom a 1 Depending on whether the system is in the CF or DXD mode dial remote location with the system in the CF or eY 3 the telephone number of a line in either the CF or DXD incoming DXD mode line aroup When the call is answered the VSP gives the appropriate message 2 As soon as the message ends immediately dial the 3 character code The VSP begins prompting you through the RLA procedure 3 Respond appropriately to the VSP prompts until you hear normal call progress such as ringing or a busy signal 4 Complete your call Using the SA button Touch the SA button on either the attendant console or the alternate attendant console Green light on SA is on Green light off SA is off 5 170 Quick Reference Guide to Using the ASA Features Quick Reference Guide to Programming Codes Programming Codes Other Numbers Buttons Feature 6 an intercom number Manual Signaling 31 Busy Buster 35 Ringing Options no ring 36 Ringing Options delayed ring 37 Ringing Options immediate ring 38 Voice Announcement Enable 39 Voice Announcement Disable 58 System Answer 70 Auto Answer Intercom 71 Do Not Disturb 72 Privacy 73 Last Number Dial 74 Saved Number Dial 75 Auto Answer
274. s 5 145 5 146 System Administration Report To print out a system administration report only 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer Dial 61 The printer prints the report as it receives data from the system Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position ann T P o nea o T P m o Administer o wae o Administer m ELH _ 61 _ _ Individual Voice Terminal Reports To print out individual reports on one or more voice terminals 1 MERLIN Plus System Features Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer Dial 62 Touch the Auto Intercom button s or dial the intercom number s of the voice terminal s for which you want a report The printer prints the report as it receives data from the system Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position E Susan 15 fal Printout Cancellation To cancel a printout in progress and to delete all waiting report requests 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 63 The printer stops printing 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position aan T
275. s of the lines you want Select lines that will compose the Direct Extension Dialing to add to or remove from the group incoming line group 59 the intercom number for the jack you Change the jack assignment of the ASA features from jack want to assign to ASA 18 the initial assignment 60 Print a System Feature Report for the system and for every voice terminal in the system 6l o Print a System Feature Report for the whole system 62 an intercom number of the voice Print a System Feature Report for an individual voice terminal terminal 63 Cancel a System Feature Report in progress and all report requests 68 three digit timer interval Set the CF RLA Disconnect Timer interval if no forward disconnect is provided by the Central Office 69 the outside line buttons Set Hold Disconnect Interval continued Quick Reference Guide to Administration Codes 3 49 Administration Code ASA feature number 1 4 and number of rings 0 9 Set number of rings before an ASA feature picks up a call plus message option 0 no message Please hold 2 Please hold Your call will be answered momentarily NOTE Youcan also append message 1 or 2 to the call forwarding message modified with the 50 code an intercom number of the voice terminal a 2 digit month a 2 digit day of the month and a 2 digit year a 2 digit hour a 2 digit minute of the hour Choose a message to be played with System Answer As
276. s of these forms for use with your system MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms 2 25 2 26 MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms System Configuration Form Required Settings Dial Signals a Touch Tone a Rotary Pulse Optional Settings Call Report a Outgoing Calls Only a Incoming and Outgoing Calls Minimum Duration for Recorded Calls Control Unit Jack Line Telephone Number Long Distance Dialing a Toll Prefix a Area Code Only Music on Hold a Low Volume a Medium Volume a High Volume Outside Telephone Lines Hold Disconnect Interval Transfer Return Interval a No Return a _ Rings Background Music uLow Volume a Medium Volume a High Volume Line Type continued MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms Local WATS FX etc 2 27 Voice Terminals Intercom Paging Groups Number Name Location 1 Template Lock 10 Attendant 11 12 13 19 BB amp Reports Oa o S S S S S 25 26 27 28 29 2 28 MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms Line Assignments Form Line Assignments for Voice Terminals a a ee a E a a Seas e a ed ee ee ee ee S E a as eae E od 5 po a ys cee e Pees ee E es pf Rf _F be I EE SE I Immediate Ring D Delayed Ring N No Ring Circled Button Free continued MERLIN Plus System Planning Forms 2 29 Line atic aa for ASA Features Feature a E CF DXD
277. s twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position ml H re 5 Administer O sae D 555 1234 E o T e P z Administer D pr Number of Rings To change the number of rings the default is two rings before the DXD call is answered 1 Slide the T P switch to P and touch Administer 2 Dial 761 plus the number of rings between 0 and 9 before call is picked up NOTE If the number of rings is set to 0 the voice terminal will not ring and the calls will be answered immediately 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position T ep J Administer m pren 5 60 MERLIN Plus System Features You can modify this message to include the following statement You have reached nnn where nnn is the telephone number of one of your outside lines The number can be up to 16 digits including or You can modify the message for all lines in an incoming line group or you can modify the message for some and leave others unmodified To modify the DXD message for one or more lines in your incoming line groups do the following 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 50 3 Touch the line button for the line on which you want the modified message The green light goes on 4 Dial the telephone number you
278. set and the headset adapter that connects the headset to the voice terminal see Section 5 Reference To place a call using your headset 1 Touch On Quiet on the headset adapter The green light next to the button goes on 2 Dial the outside number To answer a call 1 Touch On Quiet on the headset adapter To mute the microphone 1 Hold down On Quiet on the headset adapter To hang up 1 Touch Off on the headset adapter The green light next to On Quiet goes off Handling Calls 4 9 SPEAKERPHONE PERFORMANCE TIPS 4 10 Handling Calls For optimal use of the speakerphone on the BIS HFAI or SP voice terminals follow these guidelines Place the voice terminal in an area with low background noise Room acoustics and background noise may affect the proper operation of your voice terminal s speakerphone High background noise is caused by loud voices and loud electronic devices radios typewriters office equipment etc Keep the area under and next to the microphone free of books and papers Let one person talk at a time When both parties speak at the same time transmission can be broken Always face your terminal when talking Place your voice terminal at least six inches away from the edge of the desk or table upon which it rests Section 5 Reference MERLIN Plus System Features Your MERLIN Plus system offers features that provide effective telephone service both on a business wide and
279. sign an alternate attendant position Set the date for the Call Report and System Feature Report feature Set the time for the Call Report and System Feature Report feature an intercom number Set the control unit jack for the Call Report feature 0 through 9 minutes Set the minimum call duration for the Call Report feature an intercom number Set the type of calls that are printed on the call report Set the control unit jack for the System Feature Report an account number the intercom number system speed dial code and telephone number digits a plus the telephone number digits 84 0 no calls reported 1 only outgoing calls reported 2 outgoing and incoming calls reported 85 88 3 50 Quick Reference Guide to Administration Codes Assign System Speed Dial codes to account numbers for the Account Number Entry feature Enable or disable a person from changing programmed features at his or her voice terminal Assign System Speed Dial codes to outside telephone numbers Assign System Speed Dial codes to outside telephone numbers that are private only the dial code is printed on the call report continued Administration Code Other Numbers Buttons Feature system speed dial code and telephone Assign System Speed Dial codes with Restriction Override number digits to outside telephone numbers a plus the telephone number digits Assign System Speed Dial codes with Restriction Override to outside
280. signs lines to buttons iW UL UU N z OL oo Oo Oey OD ol o N nm a a o 4 E Intercom Conference p Transfer fd Drop ai Hold ii OW Line Assignments for Voice Terminals 3 25 To assign lines to a voice terminal 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Perform one of the following procedures gt Touch the Auto Intercom button for the voice terminal you re administering A green light goes on next to the Auto Intercom button Green lights also go on next to the buttons of any lines already assigned to the voice terminal gt Dial the intercom number for the voice terminal you are administering Green lights go on next to the buttons of any lines already assigned to the voice terminal 3 Touch all the line buttons that have a green light on next to them The green light next to each line button goes off 4 Inthe order that you want lines to appear on the voice terminal touch all the line buttons again If you want to reserve a button s for feature programming touch that button s last The green light goes on next to the button you touch 5 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 6 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode RINGING OPTIONS Perform the following procedure to select the ringing option for each line assigned to your voice terminals 1 Slide the T P switch to P 2 Touch the line button you
281. sole beeps twice 5 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode If you entered a number other than 2 in the Ring Interval column for Direct Extension Dialing follow the procedure below to change the ring interval for incoming DXD calls 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 761 plus the number of rings 0 through 9 NOTE If 0 is selected the voice terminal will not ring and calls will be answered immediately 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode If you put a telephone number in the column headed Modify Message for DXD follow the procedure below 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 50 3 Touch the line button for the line on which you want to hear the modified message The green light goes on 4 Dial the telephone number you want to include in the message NOTE For special phone numbers such as 800 numbers you may prefer to have the recorded voice pronounce the number as Eight hundred followed by the number instead of Eight zero zero To do this touch Hold to enter a pause after the toll prefix and again after the 800 area code and then again after the exchange For example 1 800 555 1212 would be entered as 1 Hold 800 Hold 555 Hold 1212 3 30 Line Assignments for Voice Terminals
282. son fill out the planning forms This section tells you how to use the information on the planning forms to customize the system to meet your business needs If someone else will be system administrator have that person administer the system following the steps in this section If your system will have an attendant manage incoming call traffic that person can find helpful information in this section on using the administrator attendant telephone This section contains a detailed discussion of every component option and feature in the MERLIN Plus system The entries are organized alphabetically to help you find the information you need quickly As you become familiar with the system you ll probably go to this section first when you want to change a system setting or a voice terminal feature or when you simply want to find out more about some aspect of the system Accessory Equipment includes the additional hardware that can be used with the MERLIN Plus system The accessories are listed alphabetically The tables in this section can help you isolate and solve any of the technical problems that may cause your system to malfunction Insert your MERLIN Plus Release 2 Installation Manual in this section for future reference USER S GUIDE This guide is a handy reference for anyone who uses a MERLIN Plus system voice terminal on the job Give one to everyone in your business who uses a voice terminal CF RLA CARD This card sho
283. ssage 5 132 MERLIN Plus System Features From a BIS 22 Console If you are using a BIS 22 console use one of the following procedures to turn on the message light at a voice terminal 1 At the administrator attendant console touch Send Message 2 Follow one of these procedures gt Touch an Auto Intercom button that the attendant has programmed for the person gt Dial a 3 character code corresponding to the Send Message button code on the following chart NOTE To turn off the light repeat the steps used to turn it on o en o Auto E ae m E intercom m From a BIS 10 Console If you are using a BIS 10 console use the following procedure to turn on the message light at a voice terminal 1 At the administrator attendant console touch Send Message 2 Dial a 3 character code corresponding to the Send Message dial code on the following chart Dial this Send Dial this Send If the intercom Message dial If the intercom Message dial number is code number is code Intercom 10 Intercom 20 Intercom 11 Intercom 21 Intercom 12 Intercom 22 Intercom 13 Intercom 23 Intercom 14 Intercom 24 Intercom 15 Intercom 25 Intercom 16 Intercom 26 Intercom 17 Intercom 27 Intercom 18 Intercom 28 Intercom 19 Intercom 29 For example the attendant may want to turn on the Message light at Intercom 21 but does not have an Auto Intercom button for that person The attendant refers to the chart abov
284. stem Speed Dial code 7 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position PROGRAMMING To program a general Account Number Entry button program this feature on a button with lights 1 Label the button Account Number Entry 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 82 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position aun o nan T P Acct No gua Om oO Entry o ann 82 _ To program a button for a specific account number or System Speed Dial code assigned to an account number 1 Label the button Account Number plus the name of a client or project 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 5 4 MERLIN Plus System Features HOW TO USE 4 Dial 88 plus the account number or Dial 95 plus the System Speed Dial code 60 though 89 and 900 through 999 from a list that your administrator can give you 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position auu EEE T gt P o Baa BEB T P Hm Acct No ana naa 0 Acme Co aan TaT _ 88 acct no _ To use a general Account Number Entry button 1 While you have a call in progress touch Accou
285. stering 6 Touch Administer 7 Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode If you put a 0 in the column headed Modify Message for CF follow this procedure to turn off the voice message 1 5 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict Dial 30 Dial 0 to turn off the message NOTE To turn on the message dial 1 instead of 0 in step 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode To enter or change the call forwarding destination number from the administrator console use the following procedure 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict Dial 53 Dial the destination number Touch Administer The console beeps twice Continue to administer the system or leave administration mode Line Assignments for Voice Terminals 3 29 Direct Extension Dialing DXD If there is an I entered in this row perform the following procedure to administer the incoming Direct Extension Dialing line s 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Dial 58 for the Direct Extension Dialing incoming line group 3 Touch the line buttons until the green lights show the assignments you want line is assigned to DXD line is not assigned to DXD Green light on Green light off 4 Touch Administer The con
286. swering calls that should be going to the accessory device connected to the auxiliary line If you do not want the accessory device to ring on incoming calls you can simply turn it off or set it not to ring and program Line A or Line E for normal ringing You cannot use a MERLIN Plus system voice terminal on the auxiliary jack You cannot connect a loudspeaker paging system into the auxiliary jack 5 22 MERLIN Plus System Features ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE The system administrator can administer the privacy feature for Line A and or Line E so that no one else in the system can bridge onto or monitor these lines while a call is active on them For more information see Privacy on Lines If you want calls that come in on the line connected to an auxiliary jack to ring at that device but not at any other voice terminal that has the same line assigned to it program the other voice terminals to not ring on that line See Ringing Options If you don t want calls that come in on the line connected to an auxiliary jack to ring at that device you will have to see if the device has a switch to turn off the ring and set it accordingly None Use the basic telephone facsimile machine or modem and computer connected to the auxiliary jack as you normally would Plug in the auxiliary telephone whenever you want to bridge or monitor Line A or Line E MERLIN Plus System Features 5 23 Bridging DESCRIPT
287. switch to P and touching Administer Dial 54 for the incoming line group The green lights go on next to the buttons for the lines currently assigned to the list ine is assigned to the group ine is not assigned to the group Green light on Green lighl off Touch line buttons until the green lights show the makeup you want for the line group Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position E Administer m E 555 1234 5 T P I _ _ E at o Administer m Passwords You and others in your business must enter a password to use RLA The password is 5 digits and must be entered in order to gain access to an outside line using RLA or to change the current call forward number from a remote location The first two numbers in the password are the caller s intercom number To create or invalidate a password follow this procedure 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 56 3 To create a password for a particular intercom number dial a MERLIN Plus system intercom number plus any three digits except 000 The console beeps twice 4 To invalidate any password beginning with a particular intercom number dial the intercom number plus 000 Repeat the procedure for more passwords The console beeps twice 5 Touch Administer The console beeps twice
288. sy Buster call is answered your voice terminal is alerted If there is a significant delay between the time that the called party answers and the time you pick up your alerting voice terminal the party you called may become confused by the silence and hang up Therefore if you are expecting a Busy Buster call you may want to activate the Do Not Disturb feature so that only transfer return calls which include Busy Buster calls will ring at your voice terminal If you activate Busy Buster for a number that is in the same local exchange as the number you re calling from there is a chance that when successful the call will be answered so quickly that the exchange network cannot provide the information to alert your voice terminal The party you called could become confused and hang up MERLIN Plus System Features 5 25 ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this information The system is factory set to have the Busy Buster feature assigned to voice terminal jack 19 on the control unit However you can use the following procedure to assign the feature to any other voice terminal jack in the system except jack 10 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 35 3 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the jack to which the Busy Buster feature will be assigned The green light goes on next to the A
289. sy Buster call is not picked up quickly Do This Answer returning Busy Buster calls promptly y when the voice terminal alerts you so that the other party doesn t get confused by the silence and hang up You are interrupted by other calls while waiting for a Busy Buster call Then Activate the Do Not Disturb feature so that only transfer return calls which include Busy Buster calls will ring at your voice terminal Possible Cause 3 The Busy Buster number is in the same local exchange as the number you re calling from Place the call again The number is busy Activate Busy Buster again Troubleshooting Procedures 7 9 SYMPTOM PROGRAMMED VOICE TERMINAL FEATURE DOESN T WORK 7 10 Troubleshooting Procedures Possible Cause 1 Feature is programmed or is being used incorrectly Do This Step 1 Review the programming instructions in Section 5 Reference to make sure the feature is programmed correctly and the user instructions for the feature in the MERLIN Plus System User s Guide to make sure it is being used correctly Step 2 Turn on the Call Forwarding or Remote Line Access feature Step 3 Assign a CF destination number Step 4 Assign lines to the incoming line group list and or the outgoing line group list Step 5 Remove the extra lines from either the incoming or outgoing line group list Step 6 Use the procedure listed under Custom Line Assig
290. t for the System Feature Report NOTE The system is factory set to have the data collector and printer connected to voice terminal jack 19 for the System Feature Report feature Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer Dial 85 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the jack to which the data collector and the printer will be connected for the Call Report feature The green light next to the current jack assignment goes off the green light next to the Auto intercom button for the jack to which the data collector and the printer will be connected goes on Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position BEB T p Dn m GE aon T Sec o Administer m asna C Report 29 85 7 T P Administer m E J Pre Complete System Report To print out a system administration report and a report for every voice terminal in your system 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer Dial 60 The printer prints the reports as it receives the data from the system Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position eau T P o nans o T P m o Administer 0 cen o Administer m a gt 60 _ MERLIN Plus System Feature
291. t need to readminister the system after each power failure e The memory module has a four day battery backup e The batteries are five year life batteries and are not customer replaceable Contact your equipment supplier when the system requires a replacement battery In the Event of a Liquid Spill or Leak onto the Control Unit 1 Turn off and unplug the control unit 2 Contact an AT amp T service technician immediately System Test 7 13 Installation Insert your MERLIN Plus Release 2 Installation Manual here for future reference Installation 8 1 Index maximum number of entrieson 5 6 _ O o o o Z lt o 10 Button naming Hands Free Answer on Intercom voice terminal number of 3 33 5 6 a ae aeaee description of 1 9 o o removeanentryf3 i remove from a voice terminal removing an entr description of setting up 5 6 34 Button Deluxe voice terminal 1 7 sss using with dial codes description of Alternate Attendant 5 9 5 10 O O OZO O 34 Button SP 34 Alternate Attendant console description og a aaoi See attendant console 4 9 000 OS with speakerphone 1 7 o answering machine 34 Button SP 34D See also Auto Answer All description of with Auto Answer All with speakerphone and displa with auxiliary lines 5 22 O issi i sis d 34 Button voice terminal e with General Purpose Adapter description of area co
292. tance The problem is in the control unit Contact your equipment supplier for assistance The first voice terminal is defective Replace it Possible Cause 1 No lines are assigned to the ASA incoming or outgoing line group Reference ffor instructions for administering incoming or outgoing lines for the ASA feature you want Do This If Then Refer to The feature works Press the feature button twice to stop the flashing light The feature still doesn t work Go to Possible Cause 2 Possible Cause 2 Only one line is assigned to the incoming and outgoing group and it s the same line for both Do This Incoming and outgoing lines cannot be the same line See Section 5 Reference for instructions for administering two separate lines If The feature works The feature still doesn t work Then Press the feature button twice to stop the flashing light Go to Possible Cause 3 continued Troubleshooting Procedures 7 11 Possible Cause 3 A voice terminal is plugged into the ASA jack Do This Move the voice terminal or The feature works Press the feature button twice administer a new jack to stop the flashing light assignment for the ASA features The feature still doesn t Go to Possible Cause 4 work Possible Cause 4 The ASA jack isn t administered Do This If Then Refer to The feature works Press the feature button twice Reference
293. tem Features 5 15 HOW TO USE To place an intercom call with one touch 1 Touch the Auto Intercom button for the intercom number you want to dial 2 If you hear a short beep begin speaking or lift your handset If you hear a long beep wait for someone to answer on the other end Speaker F John 12 E o phone m If the line is busy or if no one answers 1 Touch Speakerphone to cancel the call o Speaker m phone 5 16 MERLIN Plus System Features Automatic Call Restriction Reset DESCRIPTION Use Automatic Call Restriction Reset to ensure the integrity of assigned call restrictions CONSIDERATIONS None ADMINISTRATION If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this section 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 11 plus the line button you want to reset Green light on line is restriction reset Green light off line is not restriction reset System default 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position TeP ry ane Hl 1 Administer oe 555 1234 N LS a E sn TP Administer zaa E PROGRAMMING None HOW TO USE Ask your system administrator what call restrictions if any he or she has assigned to your voice terminal MERLIN Plus System Features 5 17 Automatic Line Selection DESCRIPTION You can progr
294. tem is installed the lines at each voice terminal ring immediately when a call comes in on them However you can change this so that people in your office can answer calls at their desk for someone who is away or you can program phones in public places not to ring The following tips are useful for deciding how and when voice terminals in your MERLIN Plus system should ring Immediate Ring People responsible for answering incoming calls such as the system attendant should have the lines on their voice terminals programmed for immediate ring You can also use this option for private lines that don t need to be screened or for people who answer their own calls Delayed Ring You can provide backup coverage on a shared line by having that line ring at a second voice terminal only after it has rung a few times somewhere else Then when calls come in for a person who is away from his or her desk that person s calls will ring at a second voice terminal the voice terminal belonging to a backup person Delayed ring is often useful for a secretary who can pick up calls for someone on a personal line No Ring People who do not normally answer incoming calls should have their lines programmed for no ring You may also prefer to program telephones in public places such as lobbies or conference rooms not to ring A line programmed for no ring does not ring on outside calls but does ring for transferred and intercom calls Even though the phones
295. ter The green light next to the button goes off D us oO sa m MERLIN Plus System Features 5 27 Button Free Line Operation DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION Button Free Line Operation allows people with a 5 button or any 10 button voice terminal to access lines even though the lines do not appear on the voice terminal buttons Therefore those voice terminals have additional free buttons for needed programmed features This feature is ideal for people who need several lines but who rarely handle more than one call at a time To place or answer a call they just lift their handset and the MERLIN Plus system selects a free line for outgoing calls or the ringing line for incoming calls The system administrator can assign a maximum of eight lines to a button free voice terminal However if the administrator again wants lines assigned to buttons on a voice terminal he or she can assign only the number of lines for which the voice terminal has line buttons For example if the administrator has assigned eight lines to a 5 button voice terminal with Button Free Line Operation and decides to assign lines to voice terminal buttons only four of those eight lines can appear The features that the administrator or user has programmed onto the voice terminal buttons will be replaced by lines With Button Free Line Operation the system administrator can administer the individual voice terminals so that they ring or do not ri
296. th one touch the number you dialed most recently Each time you want this feature to redial a number you must touch the programmed Last Number Dial button You do not need to do anything to save this number You may also use the Busy Buster feature to redial the number you dialed most recently The Busy Buster feature automatically redials the number you most recently dialed up to ten times at 60 second intervals If someone answers the call within this time your voice terminal alerts you To use this feature the system administrator must have assigned the feature to a voice terminal jack on the control unit See Busy Buster earlier in this section for more information On BIS 10 and BIS 22 model voice terminals the Personal Speed Dial code 24 is pre programmed as the default for Last Number Dial See Personal Speed later in this section The Last Number Dial can contain up to 16 digits The Last Number Dial feature saves manually dialed numbers and numbers dialed with an Outside Auto Dial button If you make frequent calls to a few numbers it may be more convenient for you to use the Saved Number Dial feature to help you redial numbers correctly See Saved Number Dial None To program a button on your voice terminal for the Last Number Dial feature 1 Label the button Last Number 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot pl
297. the T P switch to the center position zuu T P o asu T e P Ring sann mI O Override o age 78 _ To have all your calls ring immediately at your voice terminal 1 Touch Ring Override If you have programmed this feature on a button with lights the green light goes on o in E ere m To return to your programmed line ringing 1 Touch Ring Override again The green light goes off 0 in E a m 5 126 MERLIN Plus System Features Ringing Line Preference DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE When you receive an outside call the MERLIN Plus system automatically connects you to the ringing line If you want to place an outside call while one of the lines on your voice terminal is ringing or in use touch the line button of the line you want to use When you touch Speakerphone or lift the handset the MERLIN Plus system connects you to the line you have selected None None When you receive an outside call 1 Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset The MERLIN Plus system connects you to the ringing line Speaker o phone o MERLIN Plus System Features 5 127 Ringing Options DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION You can designate incoming calls to ring immediately at your voice terminal ring at a second voice terminal if they are not answered at the first one after two rings delayed ring or not ring at all When your sys
298. the Time If you have already set the date and time for the Call Report feature you don t have to do it again To 1 a A W N To MERLIN Plus System Features set today s date Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer Dial 80 Dial two digits for the month 01 through 12 Dial two digits for the day 01 through 31 Dial two digits for the year 00 through 99 For example if the date is May 16 1986 dial 80 05 16 86 Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position aun BSB Sug aan T o P oO aan Sean gaa gees m 22 Baa aaun aaa aan o Administer EE sua San Gua _ 80 month day year oO T P o Administer D EE set the current time Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer Dial 81 Dial two digits for the hour 00 through 23 Dial two digits for the minute 00 through 59 For example if the time is 3 25 A M dial 81 03 25 if the time is 3 25 P M dial 81 15 25 Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position T P mz fe E Administer o g Administer D Control Unit Jack Assignment for the System Feature Report To assign a voice terminal jack on the control uni
299. the ring you can use the fact that one ring cycle takes 6 seconds to determine the number of rings For example if your answering machine answers toll saver calls after four rings 15 to 21 seconds 2 1 2 to 3 1 2 ring cycles is longer than the answering machine will take to answer if you have messages yet shorter than it will take to answer if there are no messages If your answering machine uses a different number of rings for the toll saver feature adjust the time accordingly The MERLIN Plus system normally has every line appearing on and ringing at all telephones A maximum of one telephone with an answering machine should ring for each line If a line rings on more than one telephone that has an answering machine more than one answering machine may answer the call Calls that come in on common lines should be handled by a receptionist or the MERLIN Attendant and transferred to the individual telephone requested by the caller MERLIN Plus returns calls to the receptionist the MERLIN Attendant or the caller s telephone if no answer is received within the number of rings specified by the Transfer Return Interval The Transfer Return Interval must be set to be longer than any answering machine on the system will need to answer a call In most cases it is sufficient to administer the Transfer Return Interval to six rings MERLIN Plus normally provides voice announcement for intercom calls This feature will not activate answering m
300. the system Assign Button Free Line Operation to a telephone 2 6 Enter administration mode Dial 57 The green lights next to the buttons for Line A and Line E indicate their status Green light on privacy active Green light off privacy inactive Touch the line button until the green light indicates the privacy status you want Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the phone Touch the line buttons to add or remove lines Add the lines in the order that they should appear Green light on line is assigned Green light off line is not assigned Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Dial 4 Dial the number of lines in the system 1 8 Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode Enter administration mode Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number for the phone Touch the line button until the green light next to it shows the line assignment you want Green fight on the line is assigned to the voice terminal Green light off the line is not assigned to the voice terminal Dial either 31 if you want the phone to ring on incoming calls or 32 if you don t want it to ring Touch Administer The console beeps twice Leave administration mode NOTE To make all outside lines reappear on the voice terminal enter ad
301. ther employees from using voice terminals connected to Line A or Line E since this could interfere with data transmissions You can program Line A or Line E for privacy see Privacy on Lines A and E thus preventing others from bridging onto calls on Line A or Line E To have the modem answer incoming calls automatically simply set it up for auto answer as you would on any telephone line You can place outside calls with the modem either by connecting a basic telephone and dialing manually or by using the modem s autodial capabilities e Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf and Dictation Machines You can plug these devices into the AUX jack and transmit or receive data on Line A or Line E The machines will respond as if they were plugged into any other outside telephone line e Answering Machines You can plug an answering machine into the AUX jack so that when calls come in on line A or Line E the answering machine will record messages as it would if plugged into any other outside telephone line When a call comes in on Line A or Line E it will ring both on the voice terminal that is assigned to Line A or Line E and on any device connected to the auxiliary jack bridged to Line A or Line E If you are using the auxiliary line for a device such as a FAX or modem you may want to use the No Ring option see Ringing to prevent calls from ringing on a voice terminal connected to Line A or Line E This will prevent employees from an
302. tion mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position BEB T P o BEB J T P m o Administer D AA J Administer o m _ 204129 _ None Ask your system administrator what Transfer Return Interval is set for your system 5 162 MERLIN Plus System Features Voice Announcement Enable Disable DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE Ordinarily people can use the MERLIN Plus system intercom feature to announce calls through your voice terminal speaker However if you do not want a voice announcement to interrupt your work you can use the Voice Announcement Disable feature to have intercom calls ring at your voice terminal instead If someone in the MERLIN plus system has the Voice Announcement Disable feature programmed for his or her voice terminal he or she cannot hear a Group Page announcement If you use the Voice Announcement Disable feature on a voice terminal with HFAI you deactivate the HFAI feature However the Voice Announcement Disable feature does not affect voice terminals with connected hands free units and with the Auto Answer All feature activated You must program Voice Announcement Disable on your telephone if you want an answering machine to answer your intercom calls when you are not available None To program the voice announcement option you prefer for your voice terminal 1 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rin
303. to P and touching Administer 2 Dial one of the following codes to set the volume you prefer gt Dial 16 to turn off the background music gt Dial 17 to set the volume to low gt Dial 18 to set the volume to medium gt Dial 19 to set the volume to high 3 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 4 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position None Operate your audio system according to the directions that came with the equipment Supplemental Alert Adapter SAA DESCRIPTION You can connect Extra Alert Devices such as a bell hom strobe or chime to your system so that people working in noisy or remote areas of a building can be alerted when a call rings See Figure 6 10 When YOU activate the Supplemental Alert Adapter SAA and a voice terminal rings the adapter automatically activates the connected extra alert device which gives a visual or audible signal that a call has come in FIGURE 6 11 An extra alert bell and a voice terminal connected to the SAA back view CONSIDERATIONS Voice terminal ALERTER Modular voice 7 Foot Extra alert terminal cord modular cord modular cord Extra alert switch Extra alert Modular strobe wall jack Extra alert mZzoLrv 25 Foot modular cords An Extra Alert Switch allows you to turn an extra alert device on and off and alternately select between two different connected alerting devices such as a strobe during busi
304. to make an announcement through a group of voice terminal speakers 1 2 MERLIN Plus System Features Touch the Group Page button for the group you want to page When you hear a beep lift your handset and make the announcement NOTE If you don t lift your handset to make the announcement and another BIS terminal is nearby you may hear a loud squeal from your voice terminal J rp Page 5 eo V To page a group using a dial code 1 2 3 Touch Intercom Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset Dial the code for the group you want to page 70 Page All all voice terminals in the system 71 group 1 72 group 2 When you hear a beep begin speaking E Intercom o Speaker m phone mi MERLIN Plus System Features 5 77 Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI DESCRIPTION If you are using a voice terminal that has a Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI button on it without lifting your handset you can touch the HFAI or HFAI Mic button when you want to answer intercom calls hands free You will hear the other person s voice through your voice terminal speaker CONSIDERATIONS The HFAI feature can only be used for intercom calls not outside calls It is not for use with group paging calls When you turn on the HFAI feature the green light next to the button goes on For optimal use of the HFAI feature and speakerphone voice terminals follow these guidelines Place the voice te
305. to the line button still flashes To answer the call 1 Touch the line button next to the flashing green light 2 Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset O Speaker E 555 1234 D iat a O MERLIN Plus System Features 5 129 Saved Number Dial DESCRIPTION If you have programmed a Saved Number Dial button you can use the button to save an important number for one touch dialing at a later time If the number you call is busy or no one answers or if you need to call the person back you can save that number by touching Saved Number before you hang up Later when you touch Saved Number again your voice terminal automatically redials the number you have saved CONSIDERATIONS You can program more than one Saved Number Dial button for your voice terminal so that if necessary you can save different calls during the day Be sure to write on a separate sheet of paper the identity of each person called and or telephone number for each Saved Number button You may prefer to use a dial code rather than program a button in order to use the Saved Number Dial feature A Saved Number Dial button saves both manually dialed numbers and numbers dialed with an Outside Auto Dial button and numbers saved on a Last Number Dial button ADMINISTRATION None PROGRAMMING To program a Saved Number Dial button for your voice terminal 1 Label the button Saved Number 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every
306. to you without lifting the handset However if the person you are calling has activated the Voice Announcement Disable feature your intercom call rings rather than beeps at the person s voice terminal You cannot announce an intercom call to a person active on the voice terminal s speaker You cannot have both an Auto Intercom button and a Manual Signaling button for the same person If you try to program both you deactivate the one that you programmed earlier You can use either feature to place an intercom call See Manual Signaling If you program this feature onto a button with lights the green light next to the button goes on when the person at that intercom number uses the voice terminal or uses the Do Not Disturb feature When the person calls you the green light next to the person s Auto Intercom button flashes None A button with lights is recommended but not required for the Auto Intercom feature To program an Auto Intercom button for your voice terminal 1 Label the button with a name and intercom number 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 91 plus an intercom number 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position aan gan T gt P oO Gun sea 1 sms ass oO John 12 Bua asa _ 9 Icom no MERLIN Plus Sys
307. ton to activate either Call Forwarding or Direct Extension Dialing discussed later in this section To put the system in either of these modes or in normal mode you touch the CF DXD button The green and red lights show you what mode you are in NOTE Direct Extension Dialing does not work with the MERLIN Attendant gt Ifthe system is in normal mode touch the button twice to put the system in CF mode Only red light on CF mode NOTE You must first assign a CF number before touching the CF DXD button to put the system in CF mode gt Touch the button a third time to put the system back into normal mode Green and red light off normal mode A valid 5 digit password to gain access from a remote location to enter a call forwarding number or to change the current call forwarding number To enter a password follow the administration procedure discussed later in this entry MERLIN Plus System Features 5 31 5 32 MERLIN Plus System Features That there can be more than one CF DXD button in the system but a voice terminal can have only one CF DXD button If two or more users have a CF DXD button programmed on their voice terminals each of them can turn the features on and off For example if one of these users activates Call Forwarding the red light goes on next to the CF DXD button on all the voice terminals that have that button When a person deactivates the feature by touching the CF DXD button the light goes off next
308. ture Report equipment when you administer the system but you cannot assign both the Call Report and System Feature Report equipment and a voice terminal to the same intercom number If you change the voice terminal jack assignment for the data collector and printer you should administer the new jack assignment for both report features For more information on the eal Resomlandlsystend Eaa Repo options and equipment see the appropriate entries in Section 5 Reference Under Voice Terminals Do not write in a name next to intercom number 19 if your system has the Call Report and or System Feature Report option unless you plan to assign an intercom number other than 19 to the Call Report or System Feature Report equipment when you administer the system Cross out Reports next to intercom 19 if your system does not have the Call Report or the System Feature Report option or if you want to assign them to a different intercom number Then you can treat intercom 19 just like any other intercom number as you assign intercom numbers below If you are assigning Reports to a different intercom number write Reports next to the intercom number you plan to use instead of intercom number 19 Intercom Numbers 11 through 29 To simplify system administration you should assign consecutive intercom numbers beginning with 11 to the remaining voice terminals in your system As explained earlier intercom number 10 goes to t
309. ture is activated on the malfunctioning voice terminals Feature is not activated Then Deactivate the feature following the instructions in Section 5 Reference Go to Possible Cause 4 Redial or Last Number Redial are programmed or used incorrectly Do This If Then See Section 5 Reference to make sure these features are programmed correctly and the MERLIN Plus System User s Guide to be sure the features are being used correctly Any of these features are programmed incorrectly Program each feature correctly and determine whether this action solves the problem Each feature is programmed correctly and the trouble still occurs Go to Possible Cause 5 Possible Cause 5 Faulty MERLIN system components Do This Try to place an outside call and an intercom call from several voice terminals The trouble appears only on intercom calls or the trouble appears only on one voice terminal The trouble appears only on outside calls from all voice terminals or the trouble appears on only some voice terminals The trouble is caused by a component in your system Go to the troubleshooting procedure for the symptom Trouble with voice terminal lights speaker and ringing Go to Possible Cause 6 continued Possible Cause 6 Faulty telephone company wiring At the control unit location find the network interface associated with the outside line
310. u must reconnect with the caller before touching the hold button When you leave a call on Exclusive Hold for more than one minute your voice terminal rings at one minute intervals to remind you that the call is on hold None You need a button with a green light to program an Exclusive Hold button 1 Label the button Exclusive Hold 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every five seconds to remind you that you are programming and you cannot place or receive calls 3 Touch Exclusive Hold 4 Dial 77 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position D Exclusive D o Hold To put an outside call on hold so no one else in the system can pickup the call 1 Touch Exclusive Hold The green light next to the line button of the held call flashes rapidly to remind you that the call is on hold 2 Ifa call has been on Exclusive Hold for more than a minute your voice terminal will ring once every minute to remind you that the call is waiting oO Exclusive ol oO Hold MERLIN Plus System Features 5 83 To pick up the call that you have put on Exclusive Hold 1 Touch the line button of the held call E 555 1234 m To place a call on normal hold after it s been placed on Exclusive Hold 1 Touch the line button of the held call 2 Touch Hold pa 5 84 MERLIN Plus System Features Hold Retrieve DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING HOW TO USE I
311. u press the switchhook you may disconnect everyone on the conference call In order for a person within the MERLIN Plus system to be disconnected from the conference he or she must hang up None None To disconnect one outside line at a time from a conference call 1 Touch Drop 2 Touch the button of the line you want to disconnect C Ee 5 72 MERLIN Pius System Features Group Listening DESCRIPTION If you want other people in your office to hear a call you can turn on your voice terminal speaker Everyone can then hear the voice of the other person on the call without that person being aware that the call is on a speaker CONSIDERATIONS This feature is not available on the BIS model voice terminals Your speaker may make a squealing noise when the handset comes close to it To prevent this noise touch Speaker when you have completed a call and are ready to hang up your handset Another way to reduce the squealing sound is to turn down the volume control on your voice terminal ADMINISTRATION None PROGRAMMING None HOW TO USE To allow others to hear a call 1 Without hanging up touch Speaker and continue your conversation MERLIN Plus System Features 5 73 Group Page DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION The system administrator can set up Group Page groups so anyone in the system can use the Group Page feature to page up to 20 people at a time directly through the voice terminal speakers
312. ude system administration skip this information 1 Assign lines to the basic telephone a Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer b Dial the intercom number or touch the Auto Intercom button for the basic telephone that you are administering A green light comes on next to the Auto Intercom button Green lights also come on next to the buttons of any lines already assigned to the telephone c Touch each line button so that the green light next to it shows the line assignment you prefer Green light on the line is assigned to the telephone Green light off the line is not assigned to the telephone 2 To restrict the type of calls that the basic telephone can place a Touch Restrict until the green light next to it shows the code for the call restrictions you want the telephone to have Steady green light Unrestricted all calls permitted Flashing green light Toll restricted local and intercom calls Green light off Outward restricted intercom calls b When you are finished administering the basic telephone touch Administer The console beeps twice c Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position 3 Then connect a MERLIN Plus system voice terminal directly to the control unit voice terminal jack to which you plan to connect the BTMI You can also program the basic telephone by using the Centralized Programming feature on the administration attendant
313. uld be given to anyone in your company who works at home or travels frequently but still needs to make or receive business calls It contains instructions for using Call Forwarding and Remote Line Access convenient features for people who spend a lot of time out of the office Refer to Section 5 Reference for more details about these two features DOCUMENT LIST Call the AT amp T Customer Information Center at 1 800 432 6600 to order any of the following documents for the MERLIN Plus system Document Order No System Manual 999 507 148 CF RLA Card 999 502 148 Installation Manual 518 600 008 User s Guide 999 500 148 Customization Chart 999 503 148 Customer Training Video Tape 775 358 What s in This Manual 1 5 How to Use This Manual ADMINISTERING A NEW SYSTEM NEED TO USE THE PHONE BEFORE THE SYSTEM IS RUNNING MAKING CHANGES TO A RUNNING SYSTEM MANAGING INCOMING CALL TRAFFIC AS SYSTEM ATTENDANT USING A VOICE TERMINAL FOR THE FIRST TIME HAVING TROUBLE WITH THE SYSTEM 1 6 How to Use This Manual How you should use this manual at any particular time depends on what you want to do as the following information suggests Use the information in Section 2 Planning the System to decide which options ection 3 and features you want for your system then follow the instructions in Administering the System and in Section 5 Reference to set up the system with the
314. umber Send Message Turn on the message light at someone else s voice terminal attendant console only AUTOMATIC SYSTEM ACCESS Call Forwarding Direct Have your calls forwarded when you are Programmable Dial 83 Extension Dialing at a different location Remote Line Access Gain access to a company line even Programmable Dial 84 though you are at another location System Answer Have your calls answered automatically Programmable Dial 58 and placed on hold Quick Reference Guide to MERLIN Plus Features 5 169 Quick Reference Guide to Using the ASA Features Procedure Do This Using the CF DXD Button Repeatedly touch the CF DXD button until the red and green light next to the button show the ASA mode you want the system to be in Red and green light off the system is in the normal mode calls coming into the system are handled normally Green light on the system is in DXD mode ight on the system is in CF mode Touch the RLA button until the lights show the ASA mode you want the Using the RLA button system to be in Green light on the system is in the RLA mode the system is in normal mode Gaining access to a line in the RLA outgoing line 1 With the system in RLA mode the green light next to the RLA group from a remote location with the system in button is on dial the telephone number of a line in the RLA the RLA mode incoming line group When the call is answered the Voice Synthesis Processor VSP begins p
315. umber of the voice terminal where the call is ringing ENE Bau Ban Ban g Speaker o esa an phone Ean nee 3 Icom no MERLIN Plus System Features 5 41 To pickup a call ringing at any other voice terminal using Option B 1 Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset 2 Touch the Call Pickup button you programmed above 3 Touch the Auto Intercom button or dial the intercom number of the voice terminal at which the call is ringing EE f iski m E John 12 m To pickup ringing calls at a specific voice terminal using Option C 1 Touch Speakerphone or lift your handset 2 Touch the One Touch Call Pickup button you have programmed for the voice terminal Speaker o Call o phone m oO Pickup 18 El 5 42 MERLIN Plus System Features Call Report DESCRIPTION NOTE This feature is used with a MERLIN Plus system data collector and an AT amp T 475 476 or 572 573 printer or its equivalent The Call Report feature often called Station Message Detail Recording SMDR enables a business to keep records of incoming and outgoing calls The information in a printed call report gives details about outgoing and incoming calls the date and time of each call its duration the line and voice terminal on which the call was made or received and the dialed numbers of the outgoing call Call reports are printed automatically as calls go out or come in This information helps a business build reco
316. ures in MERLIN Plus systems for which the Central Office CO lines do not provide a forward disconnect signal The timer disconnects calls made using Call Forwarding and or Remote Line Access after these calls reach a call duration threshold that is set for the system This threshold may be set between 1 and 99 minutes The timer will disconnect a Call Forwarding or Remote Line Access call at the administered interval even if a conversation is in progress This feature should only be used if your CO lines do not provide a forward disconnect signal also known as a held call disconnect signal of 450 msec or 50 msec If your responsibilities do not include system administration skip this section To administer the Customer Administrable Timer 1 Enter administration mode by sliding the T P switch to P and touching Administer 2 Dial 68 3 Dial the desired three digit timer value You must dial 3 digits For example to set the timer value to 1 minute you must dial 001 a value of 10 minutes would be dialed 0 0 and a value of 120 minutes would be dialed 20 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position nan snn g Ban nnu g T eP Administer m uau nss Administer m aa f J 68 01 99 J _ T P se _ _ None None MERLIN Plus System Features 5 39 Call Pickup DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIO
317. urn the SAA to the On position If you want to use more than one extra alert device alternately 1 Turn the extra alert switch s knob to the appropriate On position labeled 1 or 2 For example if you connect a bell to position 1 and a strobe to position 2 turn the control switch to position 1 to operate the bell and to position 2 to operate the strobe If you want to use more than one extra alert device simultaneously 1 Turn the extra alert switch knob to the appropriate On position labeled 1 or 2 For example if you connect a bell and a strobe to a line bridging adapter and the adapter to position 1 on the SAA turn the control switch to this position Section 7 Troubleshooting the System Troubleshooting Procedures SYMPTOM CAN T PLACE OUTSIDE CALLS As with any piece of equipment there are times when some parts of your MERLIN Plus Communication System may not be working properly Rather than call someone immediately you can often determine the cause of the problem yourself Simply follow the step by step procedures outlined in this section Then with the problem identified you can either correct the problem yourself or know from the tables who can help you correct it If you re having trouble with your MERLIN Plus system locate the symptom on the next few pages and perform the recommended action to isolate and correct the problem The symptoms are listed on the contents page of this section I
318. ustomer Information Bulletin CIB that is provided with the data collector for the correct option settings for your AT amp T 475 476 or 572 573 printer Refer to the CIB and System Feature Report for Administration procedures None None Doorphone Controller DESCRIPTION A Doorphone Controller DAC 1Z can be connected to your MERLIN Plus system to allow employees to answer calls made from a business entrance The controller is connected directly to a CO line port on the MERLIN PLUS control unit Callers using the doorhone can press a button at the building entrance to ring a telephone in your MERLIN Plus system An auxiliary alert device such as a doorbell chime or tone generator can be connected to the Doorphone Controller so that it will ring when the doorphone button is pushed An optional electric strikeplate release can be obtained for door operation to permit the caller to unlock the door by entering a preset code on the doorphone keypad The electric strikeplate can also provide an alarm that sounds when the door is opened by unauthorized means or is not closed within a certain amount of time FIGURE 6 5 A Doorphone Controller connected to the MERLIN Plus system control unit Doorphone Controller Model No Serial No ela MERLIN Plus Control Unit o o B ol To C O for use If dedicated line is unavailable Station Accessory Equipment 6 11 CONSIDERATIONS ADMIN
319. uto Intercom button to which the feature will be assigned 4 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 5 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position 6 Make sure the BB jack is moved to the corresponding voice terminal jack you ve just assigned o Auto m o Intercom o Administer o m This feature requires a button with lights To program a button on your voice terminal for the Busy Buster feature 1 Label the button Busy Buster 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 31 you do not need to dial an outside number 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position aan Ds ccs mm usy p eee ss mm 31 lt 5 26 MERLIN Plus System Features HOW TO USE If the number you are calling is busy and you want to use the BB feature follow this procedure 1 Before you hang up touch the Busy Buster button The green light next to the Busy Buster button flashes 2 Hang up 0 bus o INA m When the dialed number rings your voice teminal rings To begin the call 1 Touch Speakerphone or lift the handset o Speaker 0 o phone If you no longer want to have the system repeatedly redial the last number you dialed you can deactivate the feature 1 Without lifting the handset touch Busy Bus
320. utside number with one touch Programmable Dial 90 an outside telephone number PBX Centrex or Custom Calling feature code up to 16 digits Programmable Dial a Personal Speed Dial code BIS 10 01 through 24 BIS 22 01 12 one of the following codes 90 an outside number or a PBX Centrex or Custom Calling feature code or 88 an account number Personal Speed Dial Dial a number quickly by dialing a code Does not require a button Busy Buster Automatically redial the most recently Programmable Dial 31 dialled number up to ten times at 60 second intervals Saved Number Dial Save a number and dial it later Programmable Dial 74 System Speed Dial Dial a number quickly by dialing an Programmable Dial 95 a System Speed Dial code administered code 60 89 and 900 999 Quick Reference Guide to MERLIN Plus Features 5 167 Feature Name PAGING Group Page Loudspeaker Page PRIVACY Do Not Disturb Privacy LINE OPTIONS Automatic Line Selection RINGING OPTIONS Ring Override Personalized Ringing Ringing Options Voice Announcement Disable Preassigned or Description Programmable Programming Code Dial 91 one of the following codes 70 for all voice terminals 71 for Group 1 72 for Group 2 Programmablet Page a group of people through their voice terminal speakers Page someone through a loudspeaker Programmable Dial 91 6 system connected to the page j
321. utton for your voice terminal 1 Label the button Auto Answer All 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you are programming and that you cannot place or receive calls Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 75 o 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position Peo sen T oP o Auto Ans m ass o All u MERLIN Plus System Features 5 11 HOW TO USE To have a modem answering machine or facsimile machine answer calls automatically 1 Touch Auto Answer All The green light next to the button goes on o Auto Ans o oO All This feature remains active until you 1 Touch Auto Answer All again The green light next to the button goes off o Auto Ans m D All 5 12 MERLIN Plus System Features Auto Answer Intercom NOTE This feature is used with a Hands Free Unit DESCRIPTION If your voice terminal has the Hands Free Answer on Intercom HFAI feature or is connected to a Hands Free Unit HFU you can have your speakerphone go on automatically whenever you receive an intercom call To do this with an HFU you must program an Auto Answer Intercom button CONSIDERATIONS You can have both Auto Answer Intercom and Auto Answer All programmed for your voice terminal but both features cannot be activated at the same time ADMINISTRATION None PROGRAMMING Program the Auto Answer Intercom feature on a button with lights To progra
322. very voice terminal in the system If you are using a BIS 22 or BIS 22D voice terminal as an administrator attendant console all the lines to which your system has access will appear on separate buttons on your voice terminal but you may not have an Auto Intercom button for each person s voice terminal in your system Therefore when you want to place an intercom call or transfer a call you may need to dial the person s intercom number rather than use an Auto Intercom button NOTE Since the BIS 10 voice terminal does not have separate buttons for outside and Auto Intercom lines its use as an attendant console is severely limited and so not recommended for that use Since the BIS 22 or BIS 22D voice terminal may not have Auto Intercom buttons for every voice terminal in your MERLIN Plus system you may need to use the special procedure described nle ing the Send Mesane Femme in this section to turn on the Message light at the voice terminal of the person who has a message waiting and 4 2 on the following pages are illustrations of the BIS 34D and BIS 22 voice terminals respectively Look at the picture of the type of voice terminal that you are using and check the location of the buttons and the dial pad If you need to check the initial button assignments for any voice terminal with 34 buttons to be used as an administrator attendant console in regular call handling mode see Section 3 Administering the System Overv
323. ving access to the Allowed List the list is assigned to the voice terminal Green light on the list is not assigned to the voice terminal Green light off gt Ifyou do not have an Auto Intercom button for the voice terminal that you want to assign the list to or remove the list from use the code from the dial code chart in 5 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 6 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position Baa BBB Ban Baa o aa EES o John 12 o 01 108 00 J T P Administer o Omo a an PROGRAMMING None HOW TO USE Ask your system administrator what call restrictions if any he or she has assigned to your voice terminal 5 8 MERLIN Plus System Features Alternate Attendant DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION You can assign a voice terminal other than intercom 10 to be used as an Alternate Attendant When Direct Extension Dialing DXD calls are busy or do not answer they can be directed to the Alternate Attendant position All other calls are directed to the main attendant position When an Alternate Attendant position is assigned System Answer must be activated from there The alternate attendant console position can do anything the main attendant position can do except turn on message lights at voice terminals and perform administration procedures The only calls transferred to the alternate attendant console are DXD calls that are busy dial
324. voice terminal on which the call is made An account code is printed if the user enters one when the call is made Seel Account Code Entry in Section 5 Reference During system administration you can set the system to generate call records for outgoing calls only or for both incoming and outgoing calls The minimum call duration when calls begin to be recorded can be set as short as 10 seconds or as long as nine minutes The default setting is 0 which represents ten seconds the time it takes to connect a call and to avoid recording busy or unanswered calls The other durations that can be selected are given in minutes 1 to 9 Under Call Report Check Outgoing Calls Only if you want only outgoing calls reported Check Incoming and Outgoing Calls if you want both incoming and outgoing calls reported Write in the time you ve selected as the minimum length for a call to be reported 0 9 System Configuration Form 2 3 MUSIC ON HOLD BACKGROUND MUSIC OUTSIDE TELEPHONE LINES 2 4 System Configuration Form If you have an optional audio system you can connect it with an RCA type phonograph jack to the Music on Hold jack provided at the top of the Control Unit Then when callers are placed on hold they hear background music while they re waiting You can control the music volume or turn off the music from the administrator attendant console Under Music on Hold If you
325. w the instructions provided with your loudspeaker page system Zo If your loudspeaker paging system is connected to the page jack on the control unit you can use a programmed button or a dial code to access the Loudspeaker Page feature To use a Loudspeaker Page button 1 Touch Loudspeaker Page 2 When you hear the beep lift your handset and make your announcement E o To use this feature by dialing a code 1 Touch Intercom 2 Lift your handset 3 Dial 6 4 When you hear a beep make your announcement ES When you hang up the loudspeaker turns off automatically an a8 ed an 6 5 96 MERLIN Plus System Features Manual Signaling DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING You can use a Manual Signaling button to generate a beep at a co worker s voice terminal Most often this feature is used by a boss who wants to buzz his or her secretary Assign a Manual Signaling button to each person you want to signal You can signal someone with a Manual Signaling button while you have an outside call in progress The beep sounds at your co worker s voice terminal even if it is busy If you program this feature on a button with lights the green light next to the button goes on when your co worker uses his or her voice terminal or uses the Do Not Disturb feature You cannot have both a Manual Signaling button and an Auto Intercom button for the sa
326. want to include in the message NOTE For special phone numbers such as an 800 number you may prefer to have the recorded voice say Eight hundred followed by the number instead of Eight zero zero In this case you would touch Hold to enter a pause after the toll prefix then again after the 800 area code and again after the exchange For example 1 800 555 1212 would be entered as follows 1 Hold 800 Hold 555 Hold 1212 5 Repeat for other lines 6 Touch Administer The console beeps twice 7 Leave administration mode by sliding the T P switch to the center position ane T P o esa Administer ol see 555 1234 o poe g T P o Administer m prar MERLIN Plus System Features 5 61 PROGRAMMING A button with a red and green light next to it is required for the DXD features To program a CF DXD button on a voice terminal 1 Label the button CF DXD 2 Slide the T P switch to P The voice terminal rings every 5 seconds to remind you that you re programming and that you can t place or receive calls 3 Touch the button you want to program 4 Dial 83 5 Slide the T P switch to the center position nun T P D EEE T P a8 D croxo O oon om 83 HOW TO USE Using the CF DXD Button Touching the CF DXD button repeatedly cycles the system through DXD CF and normal modes The red and green lights next to the CF DXD
327. want to program 3 Dial one of the codes for the type of ringing you have indicated on the Line Assignments Form gt Dial 35 for no ring N The red light next to the button goes off gt Dial 36 for delayed ring D The red light next to the button flashes gt Dial 37 for immediate ring I The red light next to the button goes on steady 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each line button 5 When you ve finished programming slide the T P switch to the center position 3 26 Line Assignments for Voice Terminals BUTTON FREE LINE OPERATION If you selected Button Free Line Operation so that incoming lines on a voice terminal are not assigned to buttons you can administer whether or not calls should ring at the voice terminal If the voice terminal is in a public place such as a building lobby you can select the no ring option If you circled T for Immediate Ring or N for No Ring on the Line Assignments for Voice Terminals form follow the procedure below 1 Enter administration mode The red lights go on next to Administer and Restrict 2 Follow the appropriate procedure gt Touch the Auto Intercom button for the voice terminal you re administering The green light goes on gt Dial the intercom number for the voice terminal you re administering 3 Touch the line button until the green light shows the assignment you want the line is assigned to the voice terminal Green light on the
328. when you administer the system s outside lines NOTE A special automatic line selection sequence for a voice terminal can contain any or all of the lines that appear on the voice terminal s line buttons Four ASA features require the assignment of at least one incoming line on which you want to use the feature These features are Call Forwarding CF Direct Extension Dialing DXD Remote Line Access RLA and System Answer SA Call Forwarding also requires the assignment of at least one outgoing line Call Forwarding CF This ASA feature connects incoming calls on assigned lines to the Voice Synthesis Processor VSP so that callers hear a prerecorded message before calls are forwarded to the designated number The CF feature requires the assignment of at least one incoming line and one outgoing line They cannot be the same line In the CF row under the Line Assignments for ASA Features Write an TI in the column of the line s where incoming calls are being forwarded Write an O in the column of the line where you want to send the outgoing forwarded calls The system is factory set to answer CF calls after two rings You can change the number of rings from 0 to 9 If the number of rings is set to 0 the voice terminal will not ring and calls will be forwarded immediately Under Ring Interval in the CF row Write the number of rings 0 9 before incoming calls will be answ
329. with voice announcement Therefore you must program the Voice Announcement Disable feature for the telephone See ycice Announce teil Disable Jin this section In order to program Voice Announcement Disable Ringing Options or an Automatic Line Selection sequence for the basic telephone you can use either the Centralized Programming feature on the administrator attendant console or program a substitute MERLIN Plus system voice terminal plugged into the voice terminal jack designated for the BTMI 2 See Centralized Programming in this section For more information on assigning lines and features for a basic telephone see Basic Telephones See the User s Guide for Off Premises and Basic Telephones included with the BTMI 2 for instructions on how to operate a telephone connected to a BTMI 2 A person using a basic telephone must dial 3 character codes to access the lines the system administrator assigns to the intercom number for the telephone For a list of these codes see Basic Telephones Data Collector and Printer DESCRIPTION The MERLIN Plus system Data Collector uses information from the Call Report and System Feature Report features and transmits the material from the MERLIN Plus system to a printer or to a PC with a standard RS232 C 1200 baud serial interface You can connect the data collector to an available voice terminal jack on the control unit FIGURE 6 4 A data collector c
330. x T telecommunication devices for the deaf with auxiliary lines 5 22 telephone number privacy with Call Report 5 44 ___ S O to forward calls to change to forward calls to enter 3 46 __ oo O assigning System Speed Dial codes to 2 23 ss telephones See voice terminals 5 1 o O testing the voice terminal 5 154_ ___ S O Test Program switch 5 115 5 154 assigning toll prefix on ie oe guration Form 2 2 Z O Y O tones Touch Tone dialing 3 37 __ oo setting the system for Touch Tone Enable in Personal Speed Dial 5 109 __ _ oo O in System Speed Dial Codes 2 23_ 0 with Outside Auto Dial 5 105 _ _ S O with System Speed Dial Touch Tone equipment with General Purpose Adapter Touch Tone lines Touch Tone or rotary setting Touch Tone service system incorrectly set to Touch Tone signals 5 136 S system set for 2 2 20 signals with Personal Speed Dialf 5 109 Touch Tone telephones with BTMI 2 6 8 sd Touch Tones system factory set for 3 10 T P switch 7 5 7 6 o to enter administration mode transfer button in Personal Speed Dial with Outside Auto Dial 5 105 with System Speed Dial 5 151 5 151 O O Transfer Return Interval 3 11 5 160 5 162_ __ administration of on System Configuration nanba ae u u on System Feature Report 5 transferred ea ica with voice announcement 5 157 troubleshooting procedures 7
331. y are used in this manual e Administer means to establish options and features that have systemwide impact such as assigning the outside lines that each voice terminal can access or defining System Speed Dial codes for everyone to use e Program means to assign features to an individual voice terminal Most people will probably program their own voice terminals But you may want to program certain features that can affect the calling patterns of your business Although an AT amp T technician may perform the initial administration of your system you can assist with the setup by familiarizing yourself with the time saving instructions located under the following headings e Administration Preview e Basic Administration e Customized Line Assignments e Systemwide Options Use the Quick Reference Guide to System Administration and the Quick Reference Guide to Administration Codes at the end of this section to make changes to the system once it has been setup and administered If you need more information on an administration procedure than is provided in the Quick Reference Guides see Section 5 Reference Introduction 3 1 Administration Preview PLANNING FORMS KEY SYSTEM COMPONENTS The information about your system recorded on the planning forms listed below is important to both initial and ongoing system administration e System Configuration Form e Line Assignments Form e Call Restrictio
332. y combining call restrictions with selected exceptions you can control your outgoing call traffic and associated costs without placing unreasonable constraints on the people in your business Disallowed List Allowed Lists and System Speed Dial codes are explained in detail in this section of the manual NOTE Call restrictions do not affect a voice terminal s ability to receive incoming calls nor to make intercom calls When you assign a Disallowed List of numbers to a voice terminal the person trying to dial a number on this list will not be able to place the call The system can store up to 20 disallowed numbers with up to 16 digits for a given number You can also use wild card digits to prevent calls to certain exchanges within any area code or similar combinations Here are some examples of how to use wild card digits e Disallowing calls to the 976 exchange in any area code 1Hold 976 or OHold 976 where the wild card digits are entered by pressing Hold three times e Disallowing calls to any area code 1Hold or OHold where the wild card digits are entered by pressing Hold three times For many restrictions you don t have to use wild card digits Here are some examples Disallowing calls to any 976 number in the 201 area code 1201976 e Disallowing calls to the 201 area code 1201 e Disallowing calls to a specific number in the 201 area code 555 9876 for example 12015559876 e Disallowing local cal
333. you are taken off hold 1 When you have been put on hold touch Speaker 2 Hang up 3 When you hear the person return to the call lift your handset and continue the call The speaker automatically turns off oa B amp G 5 100 MERLIN Plus System Features Night Service DESCRIPTION CONSIDERATIONS ADMINISTRATION PROGRAMMING When the person who usually answers calls leaves for the day you can make answering calls after hours easy for night shift personnel and security guards by providing Night Service for your office You can implement Night Service one of three ways e Provide the person with a voice terminal that has all the lines or have the person monitor the attendant console and answer calls there Be sure that all lines on which calls come in after hours are set for immediate ring If the lines are not normally set for this ringing option the person can activate the Ring Override feature that he or she has programmed for the voice terminal See e The backup person can also answer calls that come in after hours by programming a Call Pickup button so that he or she can pickup calls ringing at the administrator attendant console Since the attendant console has all the lines of your MERLIN Plus system the person answering calls after hours can pick up calls at his or her voice terminal by touching the Call Pickup button when the attendant console rings See Cali Pickup If the person is in anothe

Merlin Plus R2 System Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents